| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | ||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
Manual | Users Manual | 36.40 KiB | August 05 2013 | |||
| 1 |
|
Manual Part 1 | Users Manual | 4.80 MiB | August 05 2013 | |||
| 1 |
|
Manual Part 2 | Users Manual | 5.12 MiB | August 05 2013 | |||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | External Photos | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | Internal Photos | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | RF Exposure Info | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Setup Photos | August 05 2013 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Report | August 05 2013 |
| 1 | Manual | Users Manual | 36.40 KiB | August 05 2013 |
Operational Description The EUT is a ADSL2+ VoIP IAD with 11 channels 802.11b/g /n(20MHz) and with 7 channels 802.11n(40MHz) function. The EUT provides two completed transmitters and two receivers. The EUT use an antenna working in 802.11b /g of the state and use 2 antennas working in the 802.11n(20MHz), 802.11n(40MHz) of the state. The modulation of device is DSSS, OFDM, transmitting speed 1, 2, 5.5, 11 for 802.11b, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54Mbps for 802.11g, up to 300Mbps for 802.11n. The technology of this device used is DSSS, OFDM. The device adapts direct sequence spread spectrum modulation for WLAN module. The antenna provides diversity function to improve the receiving function. This device, compliant with IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE802.11n(20MHz) and IEEE 802.11n(40MHz) is a high-efficiency Wireless LAN adapter. It allows your computer to connect to a wireless network and to share resources, such as files or printers without being bound to the network wires. Operation in 2.4GHz is Direst Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) radio transmission, the EUT Wired Equivalent Protection (WEP) algorithm is used. In addition, its standard compliance ensures that it can communicate with any IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE802.11n(20MHz) and IEEE 802.11n(40MHz) network devices.
| 1 | Manual Part 1 | Users Manual | 4.80 MiB | August 05 2013 |
P-2612HNU(L)-FxF 802.11n ADSL2+ VoIP IAD Default Login Details IP Address User Name https://192.168.1.1 Admin account: admin User account: user Admin account: 1234 User account: 1234 Password www.zyxel.com Firmware Version 3.10 Edition 1, 9/2013 www.zyxel.com Copyright 2013 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User's Guide About This User's Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ZyXEL Device using the web configurator. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents. Documentation Feedback Send your comments, questions or suggestions to: techwriters@zyxel.com.tw Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 30099, Taiwan. Need More Help?
More help is available at www.zyxel.com. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 3 About This User's Guide Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link. Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide, Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product. Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product, the answer may be here. This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products. Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products. Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well. Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. See http://www.zyxel.com/web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. 4 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this Users Guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions The P-2612HNU(L)-FxF may be referred to as the ZyXEL Device, the device, the system or the product in this Users Guide. Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,
[ENTER] means the enter or return key on your keyboard. Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the
[ENTER] key. Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices. A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen. Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value. For example, k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024, M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on. e.g., is a shorthand for for instance, and i.e., means that is or in other words. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this Users Guide may use the following generic icons. The ZyXEL Device icon is not an exact representation of your device. ZyXEL Device Computer Notebook computer Server Firewall Telephone Router Switch 6 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged. This CPE is indoor use only. (Utilisation intrieure exclusivement.) Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 7 Safety Warnings 8 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide ...........................................................................................................................19 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 21 Introducing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................. 29 Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................... 37 Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................83 Connection Status and System Info Screens ............................................................................ 85 Broadband ................................................................................................................................. 91 Wireless ....................................................................................................................................119 Home Networking .................................................................................................................... 149 Routing .................................................................................................................................... 177 DNS Route .............................................................................................................................. 181 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................... 185 Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................................................................................ 199 Dynamic DNS .......................................................................................................................... 207 Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 209 MAC Filter ................................................................................................................................ 215 Certificates ............................................................................................................................... 217 VoIP ......................................................................................................................................... 225 Logs ........................................................................................................................................ 255 System Monitor ....................................................................................................................... 259 User Account ........................................................................................................................... 267 Remote MGMT ........................................................................................................................ 269 System ..................................................................................................................................... 271 Time Setting ............................................................................................................................. 273 Log Setting ............................................................................................................................. 275 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................... 277 Backup/Restore ....................................................................................................................... 279 Diagnostic ................................................................................................................................ 283 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 287 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................. 295 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 9 Contents Overview 10 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This User's Guide ..........................................................................................................3 Document Conventions............................................................................................................5 Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................7 Contents Overview ...................................................................................................................9 Table of Contents....................................................................................................................11 Part I: Users Guide................................................................................ 19 Chapter 1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................21 1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 21 1.2 Applications for the ZyXEL Device ...................................................................................... 22 1.2.1 Internet Access .......................................................................................................... 22 1.2.2 VoIP Features ............................................................................................................ 23 1.2.3 ZyXEL Devices USB Support .................................................................................... 24 1.2.4 Wireless Connection .................................................................................................. 24 1.3 The WPS/WLAN Button ...................................................................................................... 25 1.4 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device .................................................................................... 25 1.5 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device ..................................................................... 26 1.6 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................... 26 1.7 The RESET Button .............................................................................................................. 28 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................29 2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 29 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................ 29 2.2 The Web Configurator Layout .............................................................................................. 32 2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................... 32 2.2.2 Main Window .............................................................................................................. 33 2.2.3 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 33 Chapter 3 Tutorials...................................................................................................................................37 3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 37 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 3.2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection ........................................................................................ 37 3.3 How to Set up a Wireless Network ...................................................................................... 41 3.3.1 Example Parameters .................................................................................................. 41 3.3.2 Configuring the AP ..................................................................................................... 41 3.3.3 Configuring the Wireless Client .................................................................................. 43 3.4 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding ......................................................................................... 50 3.5 How to Make a VoIP Call ..................................................................................................... 52 3.5.1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account ................................................................ 52 3.6 Using the File Sharing Feature ............................................................................................ 55 3.6.1 Set Up File Sharing .................................................................................................... 55 3.6.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ............................................................. 57 3.7 Using the Print Server Feature ............................................................................................ 58 3.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter .................................................................................... 73 3.9 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ................................................... 74 3.10 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ......................................................................... 76 3.11 Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS ............................................................................ 79 3.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ................................................... 80 3.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device ............................................................... 81 3.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ......................................................................................... 81 Part II: Technical Reference .................................................................. 83 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens.......................................................................85 4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 85 4.2 The Connection Status Screen ............................................................................................ 85 4.3 The System Info Screen ...................................................................................................... 87 Chapter 5 Broadband...............................................................................................................................91 5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 91 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................. 92 5.1.2 What You Need to Know ............................................................................................ 92 5.1.3 Before You Begin ....................................................................................................... 93 5.2 The Broadband Screen ....................................................................................................... 94 5.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ..................................................................................... 95 5.3 The 3G Backup Screen ..................................................................................................... 108 5.4 Technical Reference ...........................................................................................................110 Chapter 6 Wireless ................................................................................................................................. 119 12 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Table of Contents 6.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................119 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................119 6.1.2 Wireless Network Overview ......................................................................................119 6.1.3 Before You Begin ..................................................................................................... 121 6.2 The Wireless General Screen .......................................................................................... 121 6.2.1 No Security ............................................................................................................... 123 6.2.2 Basic (Static WEP/Shared WEP Encryption) ........................................................... 124 6.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) .................................................................................... 126 6.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication ............................................................................................. 127 6.3 The More AP Screen ......................................................................................................... 129 6.3.1 Edit More AP ............................................................................................................ 130 6.4 The WPS Screen ............................................................................................................... 131 6.5 The WMM Screen .............................................................................................................. 133 6.6 Scheduling Screen ........................................................................................................... 135 6.7 Technical Reference .......................................................................................................... 135 6.7.1 Additional Wireless Terms ........................................................................................ 136 6.7.2 Wireless Security Overview ..................................................................................... 136 6.7.3 Signal Problems ....................................................................................................... 139 6.7.4 BSS .......................................................................................................................... 139 6.7.5 MBSSID ................................................................................................................... 140 6.7.6 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) .................................................................................... 141 Chapter 7 Home Networking .................................................................................................................149 7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 149 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 149 7.1.2 What You Need To Know ......................................................................................... 150 7.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................... 153 7.3 The Static DHCP Screen ................................................................................................... 154 7.3.1 Before You Begin ..................................................................................................... 154 7.4 The UPnP Screen .............................................................................................................. 156 7.5 The File Sharing Screen .................................................................................................... 157 7.5.1 Before You Begin ..................................................................................................... 157 7.5.2 Add/Edit File Sharing ............................................................................................... 159 7.6 The Printer Server Screen ................................................................................................. 160 7.6.1 Before You Begin ..................................................................................................... 160 7.7 Technical Reference .......................................................................................................... 161 7.8 Installing UPnP in Windows Example ................................................................................ 165 7.9 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................... 169 Chapter 8 Routing ..................................................................................................................................177 8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 177 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 13 Table of Contents 8.2 Configuring Static Route .................................................................................................... 178 8.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route ............................................................................................. 179 Chapter 9 DNS Route .............................................................................................................................181 9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 181 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 182 9.2 The DNS Route Screen ..................................................................................................... 182 9.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Route Edit ........................................................................................ 183 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS).......................................................................................................185 10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 185 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 185 10.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 186 10.2 The QoS General Screen ............................................................................................... 186 10.3 The Queue Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 188 10.3.1 Add/Edit a QoS Queue .......................................................................................... 189 10.4 The Class Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 190 10.4.1 Add/Edit QoS Class .............................................................................................. 191 10.5 The QoS Monitor Screen ................................................................................................ 194 10.6 QoS Technical Reference ................................................................................................ 195 10.6.1 IEEE 802.1Q Tag ................................................................................................... 195 10.6.2 IP Precedence ........................................................................................................ 196 10.6.3 DiffServ ................................................................................................................. 196 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)....................................................................................199 11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 199 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................... 199 11.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................ 199 11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................... 200 11.2.1 The Port Forwarding Screen .................................................................................. 201 11.2.2 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen ........................................................................... 202 11.3 The Sessions Screen ....................................................................................................... 203 11.4 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 204 11.4.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................... 204 11.4.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................... 205 11.4.3 How NAT Works ..................................................................................................... 205 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS ........................................................................................................................207 12.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 207 14 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Table of Contents 12.1.1 What You Need To Know ....................................................................................... 207 12.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen .............................................................................................. 208 Chapter 13 Firewall...................................................................................................................................209 13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 209 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 209 13.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 210 13.2 The General Screen ........................................................................................................211 13.3 The Services Screen ........................................................................................................211 13.4 Firewall Technical Reference ........................................................................................... 213 13.4.1 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall .......................................... 213 13.4.2 Security Considerations ......................................................................................... 213 Chapter 14 MAC Filter..............................................................................................................................215 14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 215 14.1.1 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 215 14.2 The MAC Filter Screen .................................................................................................... 216 Chapter 15 Certificates ............................................................................................................................217 15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 217 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 217 15.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 217 15.1.3 Verifying a Certificate ............................................................................................. 219 15.2 Local Certificates ............................................................................................................. 220 15.3 Trusted CA ..................................................................................................................... 222 15.4 Trusted CA Import ......................................................................................................... 223 15.5 View Certificate ................................................................................................................ 224 Chapter 16 VoIP ........................................................................................................................................225 16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 225 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 225 16.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 226 16.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 227 16.2 The SIP Service Provider Screen ................................................................................... 227 16.3 The SIP Account Screen ................................................................................................. 231 16.3.1 Add/Edit SIP Account ............................................................................................. 233 16.4 The SIP Common Screen ................................................................................................ 236 16.5 Multiple SIP Accounts ...................................................................................................... 236 16.5.1 Outgoing Calls ........................................................................................................ 237 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 15 Table of Contents 16.5.2 Incoming Calls ........................................................................................................ 238 16.6 The Phone Device Screen .............................................................................................. 239 16.6.1 Edit Phone Device .................................................................................................. 240 16.7 The Region Screen ......................................................................................................... 241 16.8 The Call Rule Screen ...................................................................................................... 241 16.9 The FXO Screen (L Models Only) ................................................................................. 243 16.10 Technical Reference ...................................................................................................... 244 16.10.1 VoIP ...................................................................................................................... 244 16.10.2 SIP ...................................................................................................................... 244 16.10.3 Quality of Service (QoS) ...................................................................................... 250 16.10.4 Phone Services Overview .................................................................................... 251 Chapter 17 Logs ......................................................................................................................................255 17.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 255 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 255 17.2 The Phone Log Screen .................................................................................................... 255 17.3 The VoIP Call History Screen .......................................................................................... 256 Chapter 18 System Monitor ....................................................................................................................259 18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 259 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 259 18.2 The WAN Status Screen .................................................................................................. 260 18.3 The LAN Status Screen ................................................................................................... 261 18.4 The NAT Status Screen ................................................................................................... 262 18.5 The 3G Backup Status Screen ........................................................................................ 262 18.6 The VoIP Status Screen .................................................................................................. 263 Chapter 19 User Account.........................................................................................................................267 19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 267 19.2 The User Account Screen ............................................................................................... 267 Chapter 20 Remote MGMT.......................................................................................................................269 20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 269 20.1.1 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 269 20.2 The Remote MGMT Screen ............................................................................................ 270 Chapter 21 System ...................................................................................................................................271 21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 271 16 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Table of Contents 21.1.1 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................ 271 21.2 The System Screen ......................................................................................................... 271 Chapter 22 Time Setting ..........................................................................................................................273 22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 273 22.2 The Time Setting Screen ................................................................................................ 273 Chapter 23 Log Setting ...........................................................................................................................275 23.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 275 23.2 The Log Setting Screen ................................................................................................... 275 Chapter 24 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................277 24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 277 24.2 The Firmware Upgrade Screen ....................................................................................... 277 Chapter 25 Backup/Restore.....................................................................................................................279 25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 279 25.2 The Backup/Restore Screen ........................................................................................... 279 25.3 The Reboot Screen ......................................................................................................... 281 Chapter 26 Diagnostic..............................................................................................................................283 26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 283 26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 283 26.2 The Ping Screen .............................................................................................................. 283 26.3 The DSL Line Screen ...................................................................................................... 284 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................287 27.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 287 27.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 287 27.3 ZyXEL Device Access and Login .................................................................................... 288 27.4 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 290 27.5 Wireless Internet Access ................................................................................................. 292 27.6 Phone Calls and VoIP ...................................................................................................... 293 27.7 USB Device Connection .................................................................................................. 294 27.8 UPnP ............................................................................................................................... 294 Chapter 28 Product Specifications .........................................................................................................295 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 17 Table of Contents Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting ...........................................................................305 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address...........................................................317 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions........................................347 Appendix D Wireless LANs ..................................................................................................357 Appendix E Common Services.............................................................................................381 Appendix F Open Software Announcements .......................................................................385 Appendix G Legal Information..............................................................................................409 Index....................................................................................................................................... 411 18 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide PART I Users Guide 19 20 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device is an ADSL2+ Integrated Access Device (IAD) that combines an ADSL2+ router with Voice over IP (VoIP) communication capabilities to allow you to use a traditional analog telephone to make Internet calls. By integrating DSL and NAT, you are provided with ease of installation and high-speed, shared Internet access. The ZyXEL Device is also a complete security solution with a robust firewall. Please refer to the following description of the product name format. H denotes an integrated 4-port hub (switch). N denotes wireless functionality, including 802.11n mode. There is an embedded mini-PCI module for IEEE 802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN connectivity. U denotes a USB port used to set up a 3G WAN connection via a 3G wireless card or share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. The ZyXEL Device can function as a print server with an USB printer connected. L denotes the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) line feature. The PSTN line lets you have VoIP phone service and PSTN phone service at the same time. All PSTN line features documented in this users guide refer to the L models only. When the ZyXEL Device does not have power, only the phone connected to the PHONE port 1 can be used for making calls. Ensure you know which phone this is, so that in case of emergency you can make outgoing calls. Models ending in 1, for example P-2612HNU(L)-F1, denote a device that works over the analog telephone system, POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service). Models ending in 3 denote a device that works over ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) or T-ISDN (UR-2). Only use firmware for your ZyXEL Devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device. See the chapter on product specifications for a full list of features. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.2 Applications for the ZyXEL Device Here are some example uses for which the ZyXEL Device is well suited. 1.2.1 Internet Access Your ZyXEL Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. Computers can connect to the ZyXEL Devices LAN ports (or wirelessly). You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or Ethernet line. The ZyXEL Device cannot work in ADSL and Ethernet mode at the same time. Figure 1 ZyXEL Devices Internet Access Application LAN WAN Bridging IPoE PPPoE ADSL/Ethernet 1.2.1.1 3G WAN The USB port allows you to wirelessly connect to a 3G network to get Internet access by attaching a 3G wireless card. You must leave the DSL or Ethernet WAN port unconnected and attached a 3G wireless card to use 3G as your WAN. You can also have the ZyXEL Device use the 3G WAN connection as a backup. That means the ZyXEL Device switches to the 3G wireless WAN connection after the wired DSL or Ethernet WAN connection fails. The ZyXEL Device automatically changes back to use the wired DSL or Ethernet WAN connection when it is available. Figure 2 Internet Access Application: 3G WAN 22 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 1 Introduction You can also configure firewall on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. For example, you could make sure that the ZyXEL Device gives voice over Internet calls high priority, and/or limit bandwidth devoted to the bosss excessive file downloading. 1.2.2 VoIP Features You can register up to 2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) profiles (4 accounts for each profile) and use the ZyXEL Device to make and receive VoIP telephone calls:
Figure 3 ZyXEL Devices VoIP Application PSTN The ZyXEL Device sends your call to a VoIP service providers SIP server which forwards your calls to either VoIP or PSTN phones. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.2.3 ZyXEL Devices USB Support Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (A). Alternatively, you can add a USB printer (B) and make it available on your local area network. Figure 4 USB File Sharing or Print Server Application B A 1.2.4 Wireless Connection By default, the wireless LAN (WLAN) is enabled on the ZyXEL Device. IEEE 802.11b/g/n compliant clients can wirelessly connect to the ZyXEL Device to access network resources. You can set up a wireless network with WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) or manually add a client to your wireless network. Figure 5 Wireless Connection Application WLAN LAN WAN 24 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 1.3 The WPS/WLAN Button Chapter 1 Introduction You can use the WPS button (
LAN off or on. You can also use it to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security.
) on the top of the device to turn the wireless Turn the Wireless LAN Off or On 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 Press the WPS button for one second and release it. The WLAN/WPS LED should change from on to off or vice versa. Activate WPS 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 Press the WPS button for more than five seconds and release it. Press the WPS button on another WPS -enabled device within range of the ZyXEL Device. The WLAN/WPS LED should flash while the ZyXEL Device sets up a WPS connection with the wireless device. Note: You must activate WPS in the ZyXEL Device and in another wireless device within two minutes of each other. See Chapter 6 on page 141 for more information. 1.4 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device Use any of the following methods to manage the ZyXEL Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ZyXEL Device using a (supported) web browser. Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers. FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 25 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.5 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device Do the following things regularly to make the ZyXEL Device more secure and to manage the ZyXEL Device more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the ZyXEL Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the ZyXEL Device. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.6 LEDs (Lights) The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs. Figure 6 LEDs on the Top of the Device None of the LEDs are on if the ZyXEL Device is not receiving power. Table 1 LED Descriptions LED POWER COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green ETHERNET 1-4 Red Off Green Off On Blinking On On Blinking The ZyXEL Device is receiving power and ready for use. The ZyXEL Device is self-testing. The ZyXEL Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The ZyXEL Device is not receiving power. The ZyXEL Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to/from the LAN. The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. 26 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 LED Descriptions LED WLAN/
WPS On COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green Blinking Orange Blinking Off Green On Blinking DSL WAN Off Green On Blinking Off INTERNET Green On The wireless network is activated and is operating in IEEE 802.11 mode. The ZyXEL Device is communicating with other wireless clients. The WPS connection is being configured. The wireless network is not activated. This light applies when the ZyXEL Device is in DSL WAN mode. The DSL line is up. The ZyXEL Device is attempting to synchronize DSL signal. The DSL line is down. This light applies when the ZyXEL Device is in Ethernet WAN mode. The ZyXEL Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the WAN. The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to/from the WAN. The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the WAN. The ZyXEL Device has an IP connection but no traffic. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used). The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving IP traffic. The ZyXEL Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed. The ZyXEL Device does not have an IP connection. A SIP account is registered for the phone port. A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incoming call. A SIP account is registered for the phone port and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account. A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account. The phone port does not have a SIP account registered. The ZyXEL Device recognizes a USB connection but there is no traffic. The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it. The ZyXEL Device does not detect a USB connection. Red Off Green Blinking On On Blinking Orange On Blinking Off Green/
Orange On Blinking Off PHONE USB Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 27 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.7 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the passwords will be reset to the defaults. 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for 5 seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 28 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions, or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). See Appendix C on page 347 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your ZyXEL Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 Launch your web browser. Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL. 4 A password screen displays. Type admin or user (default) as the account username and 1234 as the password, and click Login. Some features are not configurable with the user account. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 29 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. Figure 7 Password Screen Note: For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes (default). If this happens, log in again. 5 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply; alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now. Figure 8 Change Password Screen 30 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 6 The Connection Status screen appears. Figure 9 Connection Status 7 Click System Info to display the System Info screen, where you can view the ZyXEL Devices interface and system information. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 31 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.2 The Web Configurator Layout Click Connection Status > System Info to show the following screen. Figure 10 Web Configurator Layout A B C As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
A - title bar B - main window C - navigation panel 2.2.1 Title Bar The title bar shows the following icon in the upper right corner. 32 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Click this icon to log out of the web configurator. 2.2.2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. After you click System Info on the Connection Status screen, the System Info screen is displayed. See Chapter 4 on page 87 for more information about the System Info screen. If you click LAN Device on the System Info screen, the Connection Status screen appears. See Chapter 4 on page 85 for more information about the Connection Status screen. If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the connection status of the ZyXEL Devices ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray. 2.2.3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure ZyXEL Device features. The following table describes each menu item. Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Connection Status Network Setting FUNCTION This screen shows the network status of the ZyXEL Device and computers/devices connected to it. TAB Broadband Broadband Wireless 3G Backup General More AP WPS WMM Scheduling Use this screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, DNS servers and other advanced properties. Use this screen to configure the 3G WAN connection. Use this screen to turn the wireless connection on or off, specify the SSID(s) and configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to use WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) to establish a wireless connection. Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia
(WMM). Use this screen to configure when the ZyXEL Device enables or disables the wireless LAN. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 33 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) LINK TAB LAN Setup Home Networking Static DHCP UPnP File Sharing Printer Server Routing Static Route DNS Route QoS DNS Route General Queue Setup Class Setup Monitor Port Forwarding Sessions NAT DNS Dynamic DNS Security Firewall General Services MAC Filter MAC Filter Certificates VoIP SIP Local Certificates Trusted CAs SIP Service Provider SIP Account Common FUNCTION Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties. Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses. Use this screen to enable the UPnP function. Use this screen to enable file sharing via the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes. Use this screen to enable QoS and decide allowable bandwidth using QoS. Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. Use this screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. Use this screen to view each queues statistics. Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. Use this screen to limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish. Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall. Use this screen to set the default action to take on network traffic going in specific directions. Use this screen to allow specific devices to access the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to generate and export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the ZyXEL Devices CA-signed certificates. Use this screen to save CA certificates to the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Devices Voice over IP settings. Use this screen to set up information about your SIP account and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure RFC3262 support on the ZyXEL Device. 34 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) LINK Phone Call Rule TAB Phone Device Region Speed Dial FUNCTION Use this screen to set which phone ports use which SIP accounts. Use this screen to select your location. Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you call often. Use this screen to set up the PSTN line you use to make regular phone calls. FXO FXO System Monitor Log Phone Log VoIP Call History Traffic Status WAN LAN NAT 3G Backup VoIP Status VoIP Status Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Devices phone logs. Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Devices VoIP call history. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to view the status of NAT sessions on the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to view the status of 3G Backup on the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to view the SIP, phone, and call status of the ZyXEL Device. Maintenance Users Account Remote MGMT System Users Account Use this screen to configure the passwords your user accounts. Remote MGMT Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for System Time Setting Time Setting Log Setting Log Setting Firmware Upgrade Backup/
Restore Firmware Upgrade Backup/
Restore Reboot Reboot Diagnostic Ping DSL Line network services. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Devices name, domain name, management inactivity time-out. Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices time and date. Use this screen to select which logs and/or immediate alerts your device is to record. You can also set it to e-
mail the logs to you. Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. Use this screen to backup and restore your devices configuration (settings) or reset the factory default settings. Use this screen to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off. Use this screen to test the connections to other devices. Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 35 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 36 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Tutorials 3.1 Overview This chapter contains the following tutorials:
Setting Up Your DSL Connection How to Set up a Wireless Network Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding How to Make a VoIP Call Using the File Sharing Feature Using the Print Server Feature Configuring the MAC Address Filter Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS 3.2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the web configurator. If you connect to the Internet through a DSL connection, use the information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to configure the ZyXEL Device. Do the following steps:
1 Connect the ZyXEL Device properly. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on the ZyXEL Devices hardware connection. 2 Check the back panel of your device where the Ethernet ports are located and make sure the DSL/WAN switch is pointing up to DSL. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 37 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Connect one end of a DSL cable to the DSL port of your ZyXEL Device. The other end should be connected to the DSL port in your house or a DSL router/modem provided by your ISP. 4 Connect one end of Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port on the ZyXEL Device and the other end to a computer that you will use to access the web configurator. 5 Connect the ZyXEL Device to a power source, turn it on and wait for the POWER LED to become a steady green. Turn on the modem provided by your ISP as well as the computer. Account Configuration 1 Click Network Setting > Broadband to open the following screen. Click Add new WAN Interface. 2 For this example, the interface type is ADSL and the connection has the following information. General Name Type Mode WAN Service Type MyDSLConnection ADSL Routing PPPoE ATM PVC Configuration 36/48 LLC/SNAP-Bridging VPI/VCI Encapsulation Mode Service Category UBR without PCR PPP Information 38 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials ABCDEF!
My DSL PPP User Name 1234@DSL-Ex.com PPP Password PPPoE Service Name Authentication Method Static IP Address Others 192.168.1.32 Auto PPPoE Passthrough: Disabled NAT: Enabled IGMP Multicast Proxy: Enabled Apply as Default Gateway: Enable DNS Server: Static DNS IP Address (Primary:
192.168.1.254 Secondary: 192.168.1.253) P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 39 Chapter 3 Tutorials Enter or select these values and click Apply. This completes your DSL WAN connection setting. 3 You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows. 40 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Try to connect to a website, such as www. zyxel.com to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens. Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.3 How to Set up a Wireless Network This section gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters. The wireless clients can access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device wirelessly. 3.3.1 Example Parameters SSID 802.11 mode Channel Security SSID_Example3 802.11b/g auto WPA-PSK
(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey) An access point (AP) or wireless router is referred to as the AP and a computer with a wireless network card or USB adapter is referred to as the wireless client here. We use the P-2612HNU-Fx web screens and M-302 utility screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models. 3.3.2 Configuring the AP Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 41 Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Open the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen in the APs web configurator. Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > General 2 Make sure Enable Wireless LAN is selected. 3 Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select Auto in the Channel Selection field to have the device search for an available channel. 4 Select 802.11b/g in the Mode Select field. 5 Select More Secure as your security level and set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply. 42 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 6 Click Connection Status > System Info.Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status. Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > SecuritOpen the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status Tutorial: Status Chapter 3 Tutorials This finishes the configuration of the AP. 3.3.3 Configuring the Wireless Client This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network. 3.3.3.1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL utility, as in the following diagram. The wireless client is labeled C and the access point is labeled AP. Wireless LAN Setup C AP There are three ways to connect the client to an access point. Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured. Manually connect to a network. Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 43 Chapter 3 Tutorials This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point (AP) which is configured for WPA-PSK security and connected to the Internet. Before you connect to the access point, you must know its Service Set IDentity (SSID) and WPA-PSK pre-shared key. In this example, the SSID is SSID_Example3 and the pre-shared key is ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey. After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client, follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen. 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown next. Tutorial: Site Survey 2 The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks. Click Scan if you want to search again. If no entry displays in the Available Network List, that means there is no wireless network available within range. Make sure the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer. 44 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 When you try to connect to an AP with security configured, a window will pop up prompting you to specify the security settings. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting. Use the Next button to move on to the next screen. You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen, or the Exit button to return to the Site Survey screen. Tutorial: Security Settings 4 The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue. Tutorial: Confirm Save P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 45 Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection. Check the network information in the Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network. If the wireless client is not connected to a network, the fields in this screen remain blank. Tutorial: Link Info 6 Open your Internet browser and enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured. If you cannot access the web site, try changing the encryption type in the Security Settings screen, check the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network administrator. 3.3.3.2 Creating and Using a Profile A profile lets you easily connect to the same wireless network again later. You can also configure different profiles for different networks, for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work. This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an AP configured for WPA-PSK security. In this example, the SSID is SSID_Example3, the profile name is PN_Example3 and the pre-shared key is ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey. You have chosen the profile name PN_Example3. 46 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next. Click Add to configure a new profile. Tutorial: Profile Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 The Add New Profile screen appears. The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks, and displays them in the Scan Info box. Click Scan if you want to search again. You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list. Tutorial: Add New Profile 3 Give the profile a descriptive name (of up to 32 printable ASCII characters). Select Infrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP's SSID in the Scan Info table and click Select. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 47 Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect (In this example, WPA-PSK). Tutorial: Profile Security 5 This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the previous screen. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting. Tutorial: Profile Encryption 6 In the next screen, leave both boxes selected. Tutorial: Wireless Protocol Settings. 48 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 7 Verify the profile settings in the read-only screen. Click Save to save and go to the next screen. Tutorial: Confirm Save Chapter 3 Tutorials 8 Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately. Otherwise, click the Activate Later button. If you clicked Activate Later, you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it. Note: Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time. Tutorial: Activate 9 When you activate the new profile, the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection. 10 Open your Internet browser, enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER. If you are able to access the web site, your new profile is successfully configured. 11 If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen, select the profile you are using and click Edit. Check the details you entered previously. Also, refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network administrator if necessary. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 49 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.4 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding In this tutorial, you manage the Doom server on a computer behind the ZyXEL Device. In order for players on the Internet (like A in the figure below) to communicate with the Doom server, you need to configure the port settings and IP address on the ZyXEL Device. Traffic should be forwarded to the port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34. Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup D=192.168.1.34 LAN port 666 WAN A You may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer (see Chapter 11 on page 200 for more information). 1 Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding. Click Add new rule. 50 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Enter the following values:
Service Name WAN Interface Start/End Ports Translation Start/End Ports Server IP Address Protocol Select User Defined. Select the WAN interface through which the Doom service is forwarded. This is the default interface for this example, which is MyDSLConnection. 666 666 Enter the IP address of the Doom server. This is 192.168.1.34 for this example. Select TCP/UDP. This should be the protocol supported by the Doom server. 3 Click Apply. 4 The port forwarding settings you configured should appear in the table. Make sure the Status check box for this rule is selected. Click Apply to have the ZyXEL Device start forwarding port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192.168.1.34. Players on the Internet then can have access to your Doom server. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 51 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.5 How to Make a VoIP Call You can register a SIP account with the SIP server and make voice calls over the Internet to another VoIP device. The following parameters are used in this example:
SIP Service Provider Name ServiceProvider1 SIP Account Number Username Password 12345678 ChangeMe ThisIsMySIP 3.5.1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account To use a registered SIP account, you should configure the SIP service provider and applied for a SIP account. 3.5.1.1 SIP Service Provider Configuration Follow the steps below to configure your SIP service provider. 1 Make sure your ZyXEL Device is connected to the Internet. 2 Open the web configurator. 3 Click VoIP > SIP to open the SIP Service Provider screen. Select Add New from the Service Provider Selection drop-down list box. 52 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 4 Select the Enable check box of SIP Service Provider and enter the SIP Service Provider Name. Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 Go to the SIP Account screen, click the Edit icon of SIP 3. 6 Select the Active SIP Account check box, then enter the SIP Account Number, Username, and Password. Leave other settings as default. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 53 Chapter 3 Tutorials 7 Click Apply to save your settings. 3.5.1.2 SIP Account Registration Follow the steps below to register and activate your SIP account. 1 Click Connection Status > System Info to check if your SIP account has been registered successfully. If the status is Not Registered, check your Internet connection and click Register to register your SIP account. Tutorial: Registration Status 3.5.1.3 Analog Phone Configuration 1 Click VoIP > Phone to open the Phone Device screen. Click the Edit icon next to Analog Phone 1 to configure the first phone port. 2 Select SIP 3 from the SIP Account in the SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call section to have the phone (connected to the first phone port) use the registered SIP 3 account to make outgoing calls. 54 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Select the SIP 3 check box in the SIP Account(s) to Receive Incoming Call section to have the phone (connected to the first phone port) receive phone calls for the SIP 3 account. 4 Click Apply to save your changes. Tutorial: VoIP > Phone 3.5.1.4 Making a VoIP Call 1 Make sure you connect a telephone to the first phone port on the ZyXEL Device. 2 Make sure the ZyXEL Device is on and connected to the Internet. 3 Pick up the phone receiver. 4 Dial the VoIP phone number you want to call. 3.6 Using the File Sharing Feature In this section you can:
Set up file sharing of your USB device from the ZyXEL Device Access the shared files of your USB device from a computer 3.6.1 Set Up File Sharing To set up file sharing you need to connect your USB device, enable file sharing and set up your share(s). P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 55 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.6.1.1 Activate File Sharing 1 Connect your USB device to one of the USB ports at the back panel of the ZyXEL Device. 2 Click Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing. Select Enable and click Apply to activate the file sharing function. The ZyXEL Device automatically adds your USB device to the Share Directory List. 3.6.1.2 Set up File Sharing on Your ZyXEL Device You also need to set up file sharing on your ZyXEL Device in order to share files. 1 Click Add new share in the File Sharing screen to configure a new share. Select your USB device from the Volume drop-down list box. 2 Click Browse to browse through all the files on your USB device. Select the folder that you want to add as a share. In this example, select Bobs_Share. Click Apply. 56 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide You can add a description for the share or leave it blank. The Add Share Directory screen should look like the following.Click Apply to finish. Tutorial: USB Services > File Sharing > Share Configuration Chapter 3 Tutorials This sets up the file sharing server. You can see the USB storage device listed in the table below. Tutorial: USB Services > File Sharing > Share Configuration (2) 3 4 3.6.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows Explorer to access the file storage devices connected to the ZyXEL Device. Note: The examples in this Users Guide show you how to use Microsofts Windows XP to browse your shared files. Refer to your operating systems documentation for how to browse your file structure. Open Windows Explorer to access Bobs Share using Windows Explorer browser. In Windows Explorers Address bar type a double backslash \\ followed by the IP address of the ZyXEL Device (the default IP address of the ZyXEL Device is 192.168.1.1) and press [ENTER]. The share folder Bobs_Share is available. File Sharing via Windows Explorer Once you access Bobs_Share via your ZyXEL Device, you do not have to relogin unless you restart your computer. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 57 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.7 Using the Print Server Feature In this section you can:
Configure a TCP/IP Printer Port Add a New Printer Using Windows Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Configure a TCP/IP Printer Port This example shows how you can configure a TCP/IP printer port. This example is done using the Windows 2000 Professional operating system. Some menu items may look different on your operating system. The TCP/IP port must be configured with the IP address of the ZyXEL Device and must use the RAW protocol to communicate with the printer. Consult your operating systems documentation for instructions on how to do this or follow the instructions below if you have a Windows 2000/XP operating system. 1 Click Start > Settings, then right click on Printers and select Open. Tutorial: Open Printers Window The Printers folder opens up. First you need to open up the properties windows for the printer you want to configure a TCP/IP port. 2 Locate your printer. 58 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 3 Right click on your printer and select Properties. Tutorial: Open Printer Properties Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Select the Ports tab and click Add Port... Tutorial: Printer Properties Window P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 59 Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 A Printer Ports window appears. Select Standard TCP/IP Port and click New Port... Tutorial: Add a Port Window 6 Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up. Click Next to start configuring the printer port. Tutorial: Add a Port Wizard 7 Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address: field. In our example we use the default IP address of the ZyXEL Device, 192.168.1.1. The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port. Click Next. 60 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Note: The computer from which you are configuring the TCP/IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function. Tutorial: Enter IP Address of the ZyXEL Device Chapter 3 Tutorials 8 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings. Tutorial: Custom Port Settings 9 Confirm the IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the IP Address field. 10 Select Raw under Protocol. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 61 Chapter 3 Tutorials 11 The Port Number is automatically configured as 9100. Click OK. Tutorial: Custom Port Settings 12 Continue through the wizard, apply your settings and close the wizard window. Tutorial: Finish Adding the TCP/IP Port 13 Repeat steps 1 to 12 to add this printer to other computers on your network. 62 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Add a New Printer Using Windows This example shows how to connect a printer to your ZyXEL Device using the Windows XP Professional operating system. Some menu items may look different on your operating system. 1 Click Start > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes to open the Printers and Faxes screen. Click Add a Printer. Tutorial: Printers Folder 2 The Add Printer Wizard screen displays. Click Next. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Welcome P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 63 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Select Local printer attached to this computer and click Next. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Local or Network Printer 4 Select Create a new port and Standard TCP/IP Port. Click Next. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Select the Printer Port 64 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 5 Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up. Click Next to start configuring the printer port. Tutorial: Add a Port Wizard Chapter 3 Tutorials 6 Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address: field. In our example we use the default IP address of the ZyXEL Device, 192.168.1.1. The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port. Click Next. Note: The computer from which you are configuring the TCP/IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function. Tutorial: Enter IP Address of the ZyXEL Device P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 65 Chapter 3 Tutorials 7 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings. Tutorial: Custom Port Settings 8 Confirm the IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the Printer Name or IP Address field. 9 Select Raw under Protocol. 10 The Port Number is automatically configured as 9100. Click OK to go back to the previous screen and click Next. Tutorial: Custom Port Settings 66 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 11 Click Finish to close the wizard window. Tutorial: Finish Adding the TCP/IP Port Chapter 3 Tutorials 12 Select the make of the printer that you want to connect to the print server in the Manufacturer list of printers. 13 Select the printer model from the list of Printers. 14 If your printer is not displayed in the list of Printers, you can insert the printer driver installation CD/disk or download the driver file to your computer, click Have Disk and install the new printer driver. 15 Click Next to continue. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Printer Driver P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 67 Chapter 3 Tutorials 16 If the following screen displays, select Keep existing driver radio button and click Next if you already have a printer driver installed on your computer and you do not want to change it. Otherwise, select Replace existing driver to replace it with the new driver you selected in the previous screen and click Next. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Use Existing Driver 17 Type a name to identify the printer and then click Next to continue. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Name Your Printer 18 The ZyXEL Device is a print server itself and you do not need to have your computer act as a print server by sharing the printer with other users in the same 68 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide network; just select Do not share this printer and click Next to proceed to the following screen. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Printer Sharing Chapter 3 Tutorials 19 Select Yes and then click the Next button if you want to print a test page. A pop-
up screen displays to ask if the test page printed correctly. Otherwise select No and then click Next to continue. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Print Test Page P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 69 Chapter 3 Tutorials 20 The following screen shows your current printer settings. Select Finish to complete adding a new printer. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard Complete Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer. 1 Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock (a place holding a series of icons/shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop). Proceed to step 6 to continue. If the Print Center icon is not in the Macintosh Dock, proceed to the next step. 2 On your desktop, double-click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window. Tutorial: Macintosh HD 3 Double-click the Applications folder. Tutorial: Macintosh HD folder 70 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 4 Double-click the Utilities folder. Tutorial: Applications Folder Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 Double-click the Print Center icon. Tutorial: Utilities Folder 6 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen. Tutorial: Printer List Folder 7 Set up your printer in the Printer List configuration screen. Select IP Printing from the drop-down list box. 8 In the Printers Address field, type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device. 9 Deselect the Use default queue on server check box. 10 Type LP1 in the Queue Name field. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 71 Chapter 3 Tutorials 11 Select your Printer Model from the drop-down list box. If the printer's model is not listed, select Generic. Tutorial: Printer Configuration 12 Click Add to select a printer model, save and close the Printer List configuration screen. Tutorial: Printer Model 13 The name LP1 on 192.168.1.1 displays in the Printer List field. The default printer Name displays in bold type. Tutorial: Print Server Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete. You can now use the ZyXEL Devices print server to print from a Macintosh computer. 72 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams. Josephines computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the ZyXEL Device. Thomas decides to use the Security > MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to Josephines computer. Thomas Josephine 1 Click Security > MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen. Select the Enable check box to activate MAC filter fuction. 2 Find the MAC address of Thomas computer in this screen. Select Allow. Click Apply. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 73 Chapter 3 Tutorials Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends. However, Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device. 3.9 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the ZyXEL Devices LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. In the following figure, router R is connected to the ZyXEL Devices LAN. R connects to two networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the ZyXEL Devices WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. N1 A R N2 B You need to specify a static routing rule on the ZyXEL Device to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the ZyXEL Device routes 74 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B.This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Chapter 3 Tutorials N1 A R N2 B Table 3 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The ZyXEL Devices WAN The ZyXEL Devices LAN A Rs N1 Rs N2 B IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.1 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.34 192.168.1.253 192.168.10.2 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
1 Click Network Setting > Routing. Click Add New Static Route. 2 Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
Select Active. Specify a descriptive name for this routing rule. Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 75 Chapter 3 Tutorials Type 192.168.1.253 (Rs N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field. Click Apply. The Routing screen should display the route you just added. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure Bs firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. 3.10 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen. Note: Voice traffic will not be affected by the user-defined QoS settings on the ZyXEL Device. It always gets the highest priority. Lets say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and e-
mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices. In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-
mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:
Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (7) to e-mail traffic from the LAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address
(AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 7. 76 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the ZyXEL Device. Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the ZyXEL Device. QoS Example ZyXEL Device DSL 10,000 kbps Your computer IP=192.168.1.23 and/or MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF E-mail: Queue 7 A colleagues computer Other traffic: Automatic classifier 1 Click Network Setting > QoS > General and check Active. Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the ZyXEL Device automatically determine this figure). Click Apply to save your settings. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS 2 Go to Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup. Click Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check Active and enter or select the following values, then click Apply. Name: Email Priority: 7 (High) Weight: 15 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 77 Chapter 3 Tutorials Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps) Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup 3 Go to Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup. Click Add new Classifier to create a new class. Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below. Then click Apply. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup Class Name To Queue Give a class name to this traffic, such as Email in this example. Link this to a queue created in the QoS > Queue Setup screen, which is the Email queue created in this example. 78 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials From Interface Ether Type MAC Address IP Address This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select Lan. Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address. Type the MAC address of your computer -
AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you know it. Type the IP address of your computer -
192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it. This maps e-mail traffic to queue 7 created in the previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computers IP address and MAC address to queue 7 (see the Source fields). 4 Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Setting > QoS >
Monitor. This shows the bandwidth allotted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Monitor 3.11 Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS If you connect your ZyXEL Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 79 Chapter 3 Tutorials ZyXEL Devices WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the ZyXEL Device using a domain name. http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org A a.b.c.d w.x.y.z To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org. This tutorial shows you how to:
Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device Testing the DDNS Setting Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS. 3.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org 1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org. 2 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password. 3 Log into www.dyndns.org using your account. 4 Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example. Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Service Type: Host with IP address IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your ZyXEL Device is currently using. You can find the IP address on the ZyXEL Devices web configurator Status page. Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the ZyXEL Device later. 80 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > DNS screen. Select Active Dynamic DNS. Select Dynamic DNS for the DDNS type. Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field. Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345). Click Apply. 3.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the ZyXEL Device from the Internet. To test this:
1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet. 2 3 Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter]. The ZyXEL Devices login page should appear. You can then log into the ZyXEL Device and manage it. P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide 81 Chapter 3 Tutorials 82 P-2612HNU-Fx Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 83 84 CHAPTER 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens 4.1 Overview After you log into the web configurator, the Connection Status screen appears. This shows the network connection status of the ZyXEL Device and clients connected to it. Use the System Info screen to look at the current status of the device, system resources, interfaces (LAN, WAN and WLAN), and SIP accounts. You can also register and unregister SIP accounts. 4.2 The Connection Status Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning message appears if there is a connection problem. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 85 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing mode selection box. You can configure how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen in Refresh Interval. Figure 11 Connection Status: Icon View Figure 12 Connection Status: List View In Icon View, if you want to view information about a client, click the clients name and Info. Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client, click Change name/icon. In List View, you can also view the clients information. 86 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens 4.3 The System Info Screen Click Connection Status > System Info to open this screen. Figure 13 System Info Screen Each field is described in the following table. Table 4 System Info Screen LABEL Language Refresh Interval Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen from DESCRIPTION Select the web configurator language from the drop-down list box. the drop-down list box. Device Information Host Name This field displays the ZyXEL Device system name. It is used for identification. You can change this in the Maintenance > System screens Host Name field. Model Name This is the model name of your device. MAC Address This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your ZyXEL Device. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 87 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens LABEL Firmware Version DESCRIPTION This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device. It also shows the date the firmware version was created. Go to the Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade screen to change it. WAN Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask LAN Information IP Address This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP. This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the WAN. This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the LAN. This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN. IP Subnet Mask DHCP Server This field displays what DHCP services the ZyXEL Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:
Server - The ZyXEL Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The ZyXEL Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. WLAN Information Channel WPS Status This is the channel number used by the ZyXEL Device now. Configured displays when a wireless client has connected to the ZyXEL Device or WPS is enabled and wireless or wireless security settings have been configured. Unconfigured displays if WPS is disabled or wireless security settings have not been configured. SSID (1~4) Information SSID Status Security Mode Interface Status This is the descriptive name used to identify the ZyXEL Device in the wireless LAN. This shows whether or not the SSID is enabled (on). This displays the type of security the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless LAN. Interface This column displays each interface the ZyXEL Device has. 88 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens LABEL Status DESCRIPTION This field indicates whether or not the ZyXEL Device is using the interface. For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down
(line is down), Up (line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial
(starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation. For the WAN interface, this field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and Down when the ZyXEL Device is not using the interface. For the LAN interface, this field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and Down when the ZyXEL Device is not using the interface. For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled. For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting. Rate For the WAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting. For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate. For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled. System Status System Up Time Current Date/Time This field displays how long the ZyXEL Device has been running since it last started up. The ZyXEL Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Reboot), or when you reset it (see Chapter 1 on page 28). This field displays the current date and time in the ZyXEL Device. You can change this in Maintenance > Time Setting. System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Devices processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications. This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Devices memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Chapter 25 on page 281, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds. Power Usage This field displays what percentage of traffic passing through the ZyXEL Device is using NAT. USB Status Type This shows the type of device connected to the ZyXEL Device. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 89 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens LABEL Status DESCRIPTION This shows whether the device is currently active (Up). This shows N/A if there are no device connected to the ZyXEL Device or the connected device is not working. Registration Status Account Action This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account. You have to register SIP accounts with a SIP server to use VoIP. If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server, Click Unregister to delete the SIP accounts registration in the SIP server. This does not cancel your SIP account, but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name. The second field displays Registered. If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server, Click Register to have the ZyXEL Device attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server. The second field displays the reason the account is not registered. Inactive - The SIP account is not active. You can activate it in VoIP >
SIP > SIP Settings. Register Fail - The last time the ZyXEL Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server, the attempt failed. The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the ZyXEL Device or when you activate it. This shows Active when the SIP account has been registered and ready for use or In-Active when the SIP account is not yet registered. This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account. You can change these in VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings. Account Status URI 90 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 5 Broadband 5.1 Overview This chapter discusses the ZyXEL Devices Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your ZyXEL Device for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 14 LAN and WAN LAN WAN 3G (third generation) standards for the sending and receiving of voice, video, and data in a mobile environment. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 91 Chapter 5 Broadband You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the ZyXEL Device to use this 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails. Figure 15 3G WAN Connection 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Broadband screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the WAN settings on the ZyXEL Device for Internet access
(Section 5.2 on page 94). Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection (Section 5.3 on page 108). Table 5 WAN Setup Overview LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERFACE DSL LINK MODE TYPE Ethernet Routing INTERNET CONNECTION WAN SERVICE TYPE PPPoE ATM EoA IPoE N/A PPPoE IPoE N/A Bridge Routing Bridge CONNECTION SETTINGS PPP user name and password, WAN IP address, DNS server and default gateway WAN IP address, NAT, DNS server and default gateway N/A PPP user name and password, WAN IP address, DNS server and default gateway WAN IP address, NAT, DNS server and default gateway N/A 5.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. 92 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the ZyXEL Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the ZyXEL Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the ZyXEL Device tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es). ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a LAN and WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit (VC) between two endpoints before the actual data exchange begins. 3G 3G (Third Generation) is a digital, packet-switched wireless technology. Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data. It allows fast transfer of voice and non-voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices. Finding Out More See Section 5.4 on page 110 for advanced technical information on WAN and 3G. See Chapter 3 on page 37 for WAN tutorials. 5.1.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 93 Chapter 5 Broadband 5.2 The Broadband Screen The ZyXEL Device must have a WAN interface to allow users to use the Ethernet WAN port or DSL port to access the Internet. Use the Broadband screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. Note: The ATM and Ethernet layer-2 interfaces cannot work at the same time. Click Network Setting > Broadband. The following screen opens. Figure 16 Network Setting > Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband LABEL Switch WAN Mode Type DESCRIPTION The default WAN mode is ADSL. If you prefer not to use a DSL line and you have another broadband modem or router (such as ADSL) available, you can select EtherWAN from the drop-down list box and click Switch WAN Interface. The ZyXEL Device will use Ethernet WAN as the WAN mode. Click this to create a new WAN interface. This is the index number of the connection. This is the service name of the connection. This shows the type of interface used by this connection. This shows whether the connection is in routing mode or bridge mode. This shows the method of encapsulation used by this connection. This is the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI). This is the Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI). Add new WAN Interface Internet Setup
Name Type Mode Encapsulation VPI VCI 94 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband (continued) LABEL Vlan8021p DESCRIPTION This indicates the 802.1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no priority level assigned. This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned. This shows the ATM Quality of Service (QoS) type configured for this connection. This displays N/A when there is no ATM QoS assigned. This shows whether IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is activated or not for this connection. IGMP is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection. NAT is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. This shows whether the ZyXEL Device uses the interface of this connection as the system default gateway. Click the Edit icon to configure the connection. VlanMuxId ATM QoS IGMP Proxy NAT Default Gateway Modify Click the Delete icon to delete this connection from the ZyXEL Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the connection. 5.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection Use this screen to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the encapsulation and WAN service type you select. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 95 Chapter 5 Broadband 5.2.1.1 Routing- PPPoE Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure. Select Routing as the encapsulation mode and PPPoE as the WAN service type. Figure 17 Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- PPPoE 96 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 7 Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- PPPoE Label DESCRIPTION General Name Type Mode WAN Service Type Enter a service name of the connection. Select an interface for which you want to configure here. ADSL: The ZyXEL Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. EtherWAN: The ZyXEL Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port. Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already. Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. This field is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field. Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP. PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) - PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. Select this if you have a username and password for Internet access. IP over Ethernet - In this type of Internet connection, IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. ATM PVC Configuration VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. VPI VCI DSL Link Type Encapsulation Mode This section is available only when you select ADSL in the Type field to configure an ATM layer-2 interface. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. The DSL link type is set to EoA (Ethernet over ATM) to have an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/
connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports IPoE, PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. The encapsulation method of multiplexing used by your is LLC/SNAP-
BRIDGING. In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 97 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- PPPoE (continued) Label DESCRIPTION Service Category Select UBR Without PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Constant Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. Sustainable Cell Rate This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. This section is available only when you select EtherWAN in the Type field. Select this to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Type the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. This section is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field and PPPoE in the WAN Service Type field. Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. Enter the password associated with the user name above. Type the name of your PPPoE service here. Maximum Burst Size VLAN Enable VLAN Enter 802.1P Priority Enter 802.1Q VLAN ID PPP Information PPP User Name PPP Password PPPoE Service Name 98 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- PPPoE (continued) Label DESCRIPTION The ZyXEL Device supports PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). CHAP is more secure than PAP; however, PAP is readily available on more platforms. Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:
AUTO: Your ZyXEL Device accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node. CHAP: Your ZyXEL Device accepts CHAP only. PAP: Your ZyXEL Device accepts PAP only. MSCHAP: Your ZyXEL Device accepts MSCHAP only. MS-CHAP is the Microsoft version of the CHAP. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you want to get a dynamic IP address from the ISP. Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. In addition to the ZyXEL Devices built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the ZyXEL Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate. Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP. Select this option to activate NAT on this connection. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the ZyXEL Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. The section is not available when you select Bridge in the WAN Service Type field. Select this to have the ZyXEL Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select this to have the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Authentication Mode Use Static IP Address IP Address PPPoE Passthrough Routing Feature NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server Obtain DNS info Automatically Use the following Static DNS IP Address P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 99 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- PPPoE (continued) Label DESCRIPTION Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Apply Back Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen. 5.2.1.2 Routing- IPoE Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure. Select Routing as the encapsulation mode and IPoE as the WAN service type. 100 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- IPoE Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 8 Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- IPoE Label DESCRIPTION General Name Enter a service name of the connection. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 101 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 8 Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- IPoE (continued) Label DESCRIPTION Select an interface for which you want to configure here. Type Mode WAN Service Type ADSL: The ZyXEL Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. EtherWAN: The ZyXEL Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port. Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already. Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. This field is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field. Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP. PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) - PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. Select this if you have a username and password for Internet access. IP over Ethernet - In this type of Internet connection, IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. ATM PVC Configuration VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. VPI VCI DSL Link Type Encapsulation Mode This section is available only when you select ADSL in the Type field to configure an ATM layer-2 interface. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. The DSL link type is set to EoA (Ethernet over ATM) to have an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/
connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports IPoE, PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. The encapsulation method of multiplexing used by your is LLC/SNAP-
BRIDGING. In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. Service Category Select UBR Without PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Constant Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. 102 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 8 Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- IPoE (continued) Label DESCRIPTION Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. Sustainable Cell Rate This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. Maximum Burst Size VLAN Enable VLAN Enter 802.1P Priority Enter 802.1Q VLAN ID IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Enable DHCP Option 60 Vendor Class Identifier This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. This section is available only when you select EtherWAN in the Type field. Select this to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Type the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. This section is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field and IPoE in the WAN Service Type field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you want to get a dynamic IP address from the ISP. Select this to identify the vendor and functionality of the ZyXEL Device in DHCP requests that the ZyXEL Device sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address. Enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60), such as the type of the hardware or firmware. Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Routing Feature NAT Enable Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP. Select this option to activate NAT on this connection. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 103 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 8 Broadband Add/Edit: Routing- IPoE (continued) Label IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server Obtain DNS info Automatically Use the following Static DNS IP Address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server DESCRIPTION Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the ZyXEL Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. This is available only when you select Apply as Default Gateway in the Routing Feature field. Select this to have the ZyXEL Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select this to have the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Apply Back Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen. 5.2.1.3 Bridge Mode Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure. Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode. The screen differs according to the interface 104 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband type you select. If you select ADSL as the interface type, the following screen appears. Figure 18 Broadband Add/Edit: Bridge (ADSL) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 9 Broadband Add/Edit: Bridge (ADSL) Label DESCRIPTION General Name Type Mode Enter a service name of the connection. Select ADSL as the interface for which you want to configure here. The ZyXEL Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 105 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 9 Broadband Add/Edit: Bridge (ADSL) (continued) Label DESCRIPTION Select the LAN/WLAN port(s) from which traffic will be forwarded to the WAN interface directly. Bridge Group ATM PVC Configuration VPI VCI DSL Link Type Encapsulation Mode Select a port from the Available LAN/WLAN Port(s) list and click Add >> to add it to the Bridged LAN/WLAN Port(s) list. If you want to remove a port from the Bridged LAN/WLAN Port(s) list, select it and click Remove <<. You cannot configure a QoS class for traffic from the LAN port which is selected here. VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. This section is available only when you select ADSL in the Type field to configure an ATM layer-2 interface. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. The DSL link type is set to EoA (Ethernet over ATM) to have an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/
connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports IPoE, PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. The encapsulation method of multiplexing used by your is LLC/SNAP-
BRIDGING. In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. Service Category Select UBR Without PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Constant Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. Sustainable Cell Rate This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. 106 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 9 Broadband Add/Edit: Bridge (ADSL) (continued) Label Maximum Burst Size DESCRIPTION Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. Apply Back This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen. If you select EtherWAN as the interface type, the following screen appears. Figure 19 Broadband Add/Edit: Bridge (Ethernet) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 10 Broadband Add/Edit: Bridge (Ethernet) Label DESCRIPTION General Name Type Mode VLAN Enter a service name of the connection. Select EtherWAN as the interface for which you want to configure The ZyXEL Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port. Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). This section is available only when you select EtherWAN in the Type field. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 107 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Broadband Add/Edit: Bridge (Ethernet) (continued) Label Enable VLAN Enter 802.1P Priority Enter 802.1Q VLAN ID Bridge Group Apply Back DESCRIPTION Select this to add the VLAN Tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Type the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. Select the LAN/WLAN port(s) from which traffic will be forwarded to the WAN interface directly. Select a port from the Available LAN/WLAN Port(s) list and click Add >> to add it to the Bridged LAN/WLAN Port(s) list. If you want to remove a port from the Bridged LAN/WLAN Port(s) list, select it and click Remove <<. You cannot configure a QoS class for traffic from the LAN port which is selected here. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen. 5.3 The 3G Backup Screen Use this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click Broadband > 3G Backup. At the time of writing, the 3G card you can use in the ZyXEL Device is Huawei E220. Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal strength to the service providers base station, and so on. 108 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband If the signal strength of a 3G network is too low, the 3G card may switch to an available 2.5G or 2.75G network. Refer to Section 5.4 on page 110 for a comparison between 2G, 2.5G, 2.75G and 3G wireless technologies. Figure 20 Broadband > 3G Backup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 11 Broadband > 3G Backup LABEL 3G Backup DESCRIPTION Select Enable 3G Backup to have the ZyXEL Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails. This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in the ZyXEL Device. Otherwise, it displays N/A. Type the user name (of up to 70 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service provider. Type the password (of up to 70 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name above. A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code, you cannot use the 3G card. Card Description Username Password PIN If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example) provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet. If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 109 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 11 Broadband > 3G Backup (continued) LABEL Dial String DESCRIPTION Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service providers base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number. APN Code For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan. Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media Messaging Service)) and charge method. Connection You can enter up to 31 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed. Select Nailed-UP if you do not want the connection to time out. Select On-Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field. Max Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the ZyXEL Obtain an IP Address Automatically Use the following static IP address IP Address Obtain DNS info dynamically Use the following static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server Device automatically disconnects from the ISP. Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP address. Select this to have the ZyXEL Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select this to have the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. 5.4 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the ZyXEL Device features described in this chapter. 110 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The ZyXEL Device can work in bridge mode or routing mode. When the ZyXEL Device is in routing mode, it supports the following methods. IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells. PPP over Ethernet Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the ZyXEL Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the ZyXEL Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit
(VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 111 Chapter 5 Broadband Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. 112 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 21 Example of Traffic Shaping Chapter 5 Broadband ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time (VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 113 Chapter 5 Broadband Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway. Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/
length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame). 114 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094. TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. At start up, the ZyXEL Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the ZyXEL Device periodically updates this information. DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The ZyXEL Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 115 Chapter 5 Broadband 1 2 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the ZyXEL Devices WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. 116 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband 3G Comparison Table See the following table for a comparison between 2G, 2.5G, 2.75G and 3G wireless technologies. Table 12 2G, 2.5G, 2.75G, 3G and 3.5G Wireless Technologies NAME TYPE 2G Circuit-
switched MOBILE PHONE AND DATA STANDARDS GSM-BASED GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications), Personal Handy-phone System (PHS), etc. DATA SPEED Slow CDMA-BASED Interim Standard 95 (IS-95), the first CDMA-based digital cellular standard pioneered by Qualcomm. The brand name for IS-95 is cdmaOne. IS-95 is also known as TIA-EIA-95. CDMA2000 is a hybrid 2.5G / 3G protocol of mobile telecommunications standards that use CDMA, a multiple access scheme for digital radio. CDMA2000 1xRTT (1 times Radio Transmission Technology) is the core CDMA2000 wireless air interface standard. It is also known as 1x, 1xRTT, or IS-2000 and considered to be a 2.5G or 2.75G technology. CDMA2000 EV-DO (Evolution-Data Optimized, originally 1x Evolution-
Data Only), also referred to as EV-
DO, EVDO, or just EV, is an evolution of CDMA2000 1xRTT and enables high-speed wireless connectivity. It is also denoted as IS-856 or High Data Rate (HDR). 2.5G Packet-
switched 2.75G Packet-
switched GPRS (General Packet Radio Services), High-Speed Circuit-
Switched Data (HSCSD), etc. Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE), Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS), etc. 3G Packet-
switched 3.5G Packet-
switched UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System), a third-generation (3G) wireless standard defined in ITUA specification, is sometimes marketed as 3GSM. The UMTS uses GSM infrastructures and W-
CDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) as the air interface. HSDPA (High-Speed Downlink Packet Access) is a mobile telephony protocol, used for UMTS-based 3G networks and allows for higher data transfer speeds. A. The International Telecommunication Union (ITU) is an international organization within which governments and the private sector coordinate global telecom networks and services. Fast P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 117 Chapter 5 Broadband 118 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 6 Wireless 6.1 Overview This chapter describes the ZyXEL Devices Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Devices wireless connection. 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode (Section 6.2 on page 121). Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your ZyXEL Device (Section 6.3 on page 129). Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN
(Personal Identification Number) (Section 6.4 on page 131). Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications (Section 6.5 on page 133). Use the Scheduling screen to schedule a time period for the wireless LAN to operate each day (Section 6.6 on page 135). You dont necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection. For example, you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless radio channel and some security in the General screen. 6.1.2 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 119 Chapter 6 Wireless An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 22 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your ZyXEL Device is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. 120 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. 6.1.3 Before You Begin Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See Section 6.7 on page 135 if some of the terms used here do not make sense to you. What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support (IEEE 802.11g, for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?
What security options do the other wireless devices support (WPA-PSK, for example)? What is the best one to use?
Do the other wireless devices support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you can set up a well-secured network very easily. Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this is somewhat more complicated to do. What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to configure advanced options, ensure that you know precisely what you want to do. If you do not want to configure advanced options, leave them alone. 6.2 The Wireless General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Devices SSID or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Devices new settings. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 121 Chapter 6 Wireless Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Figure 23 Network Setting > Wireless > General DESCRIPTION The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Network > Wireless LAN > General LABEL Wireless Network Setup Wireless Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name (SSID) The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Select the Enable Wireless LAN check box to activate the wireless LAN. Hide SSID BSSID Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the ZyXEL Device when wireless LAN is enabled. 122 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 13 Network > Wireless LAN > General (continued) LABEL Mode Select DESCRIPTION This makes sure that only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the ZyXEL Device. Select 802.11b/g/n to allow IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced. Select 802.11b/g to allow both IEEE802.11b and IEEE802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced. Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Select 802.11n only in 2.4G band to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices with the same frequency range (2.4 GHz) to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Set the channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel or use Auto to have the ZyXEL Device automatically determine a channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The channel number which the ZyXEL Device is currently using then displays in the Operating Channel field. Click this button to have the ZyXEL Device immediately scan for and select a channel (which is not used by another device) whenever the device reboots or the wireless setting is changed. This is the channel currently being used by your AP. Select Basic or More Secure to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the ZyXEL Device. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. Channel Selection Scan Operating Channel Security Level Security Mode Apply Cancel See the following sections for more details about wireless security modes. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 6.2.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 123 Chapter 6 Wireless Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 24 Wireless > General: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 Wireless > General: No Security LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Choose No Security from the sliding bar. 6.2.2 Basic (Static WEP/Shared WEP Encryption) WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points (AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. There are two types of WEP authentication namely, Open System (Static WEP) and Shared Key (Shared WEP). Open system is implemented for ease-of-use and when security is not an issue. The wireless station and the AP or peer computer do not share a secret key. Thus the wireless stations can associate with any AP or peer computer and listen to any transmitted data that is not encrypted. Shared key mode involves a shared secret key to authenticate the wireless station to the AP or peer computer. This requires you to enable the wireless LAN security and use same settings on both the wireless station and the AP or peer computer. 124 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Settings >
Wireless to display the General screen. Select Basic as the security level. Then select Static WEP or Shared WEP from the Security Mode list. Figure 25 Wireless > General: Basic (Static WEP/Shared WEP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 15 Wireless > General: Basic (Static WEP/Shared WEP) LABEL Security Mode DESCRIPTION Choose Static WEP or Shared WEP from the drop-down list box. Select Static WEP to have the ZyXEL Device allow association with wireless clients that use Open System mode. Data transfer is encrypted as long as the wireless client has the correct WEP key for encryption. The ZyXEL Device authenticates wireless clients using Shared Key mode that have the correct WEP key. WEP Key Select Shared WEP to have the ZyXEL Device authenticate only those wireless clients that use Shared Key mode and have the correct WEP key. Enter a WEP key that will be used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission. If you want to manually set the WEP key, enter any 5 or 13 characters
(ASCII string) or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for a 64-
bit or 128-bit WEP key respectively. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 125 Chapter 6 Wireless 6.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the ZyXEL Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be. Click Network Settings > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 26 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Wireless > General: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Level Security Mode Pre-Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA/WPA2 and WPA-PSK/
DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. WPA2-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters or 64 hexidecimal digits. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide more to hide them. more.../hide more 126 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 16 Wireless > General: WPA(2)-PSK (continued) LABEL WPA-PSK Compatible DESCRIPTION This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode. Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously. If the security mode is WPA-PSK, the encryption mode is set to TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) security on your wireless network. Encryption If the security mode is WPA-PSK2 and WPA-PSK Compatible is disabled, the encryption mode is set to AES to enable Advanced Encryption System (AES) security on your wireless network. AES provides superior security to TKIP. If the security mode is WPA-PSK2 and WPA-PSK Compatible is enabled, the encryption mode is set to TKIPAES MIX to allow both TKIP and AES types of security in your wireless network. 6.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least backwards compatible with older devices. The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 127 Chapter 6 Wireless Click Network Settings > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Figure 27 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) LABEL Security Level Security Mode Authentication Server DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. IP Address Port Number Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the ZyXEL Device. more.../hide more WPA Compatible The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide more to hide them. This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously. 128 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 17 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) (continued) LABEL Group Key Update Timer Encryption DESCRIPTION The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. If the security mode is WPA, the encryption mode is set to TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) security on your wireless network. If the security mode is WPA2 and WPA Compatible is disabled, the encryption mode is set to AES to enable Advanced Encryption System
(AES) security on your wireless network. AES provides superior security to TKIP. If the security mode is WPA2 and WPA Compatible is enabled, the encryption mode is set to TKIPAES MIX to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. 6.3 The More AP Screen The ZyXEL Device can broadcast up to four wireless network names at the same time. This means that users can connect to the ZyXEL Device using different SSIDs. You can secure the connection on each SSID profile so that wireless clients connecting to the ZyXEL Device using different SSIDs cannot communicate with each other. This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the ZyXEL Device. Click Network Settings > Wireless > More AP. The following screen displays. Figure 28 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP LABEL
Active DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 129 Chapter 6 Wireless Table 18 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP (continued) LABEL SSID DESCRIPTION An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the ZyXEL Devices BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. Security Modify 6.3.1 Edit More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. Figure 29 Wireless > More AP: Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 19 Wireless > More AP: Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless Select the Enable Wireless LAN check box to activate the wireless LAN. Wireless Network Settings 130 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 19 Wireless > More AP: Edit (continued) LABEL Wireless Network Name (SSID) DESCRIPTION The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Hide SSID BSSID Security Level Security Mode Apply Back Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the ZyXEL Device when wireless LAN is enabled. Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the ZyXEL Device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. See Section 6.2.1 on page 123 for more details about this field. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to exit this screen without saving. 6.4 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your ZyXEL Device. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Section 6.7.6.3 on page 143 for more information about WPS. Note: The ZyXEL Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see Section 6.2 on page 121). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or No Security. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 131 Chapter 6 Wireless Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function. You can configure the WPS settings in this screen. Figure 30 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS LABEL Enable WPS Add a new device with WPS Method Method 1PBC DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate WPS on the ZyXEL Device. WPS Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC). Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the ZyXEL Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Method 2 PIN Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN
(Personal Identification Number) of the client into the ZyXEL Device. 132 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 20 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. Register You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the ZyXEL Device. WPS Configuration Summary AP PIN The PIN of the ZyXEL Device is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Click the Generate New PIN button to have the ZyXEL Device create a new PIN. This displays Configured when the ZyXEL Device has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Not Configured when there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the ZyXEL Device or you click Release Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. This button is available when the WPS status is Configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the ZyXEL Device. This is the 802.11 mode used. Only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the ZyXEL Device. This is the name of the wireless network. This is the type of wireless security employed by the network. Click Apply to save your changes. Status Release Configuration 802.11 Mode SSID Security Apply 6.5 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) wireless networks for multimedia applications. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 133 Chapter 6 Wireless Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays. Figure 31 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM LABEL Enable WMM of SSID1~4 DESCRIPTION This enables the ZyXEL Device to automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. Click this to increase battery life for battery-powered wireless clients. APSD uses a longer beacon interval when transmitting traffic that does not require a short packet exchange interval. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Enable WMM Automatic Power Save Deliver (APSD) Apply Cancel 134 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6.6 Scheduling Screen Click Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling to open the Wireless LAN Scheduling screen. Use this screen to configure when the ZyXEL Device enables or disables the wireless LAN. Figure 32 Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 22 Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling LABEL Wireless LAN Scheduling WLAN status Day During the following times DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate wireless LAN scheduling on your ZyXEL Device. Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Select the day(s) you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off. Specify the time period during which to apply the schedule. For example, you want the wireless network to be only available during work hours. Check Mon ~ Fri in the day column, and specify 8:00 ~
18:00 in the time table. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 6.7 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 135 Chapter 6 Wireless 6.7.1 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the ZyXEL Devices web configurator. Table 23 Additional Wireless Terms TERM RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices DESCRIPTION are sometimes not aware of each others presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device. A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the ZyXEL Device does, it cannot communicate with the ZyXEL Device. The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. Preamble Authentication Fragmentation Threshold 6.7.2 Wireless Security Overview By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. 136 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point
(which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 6.7.2.1 SSID Normally, the ZyXEL Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the ZyXEL Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 6.7.2.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 137 Chapter 6 Wireless You can use the MAC address filter to tell the ZyXEL Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 6.7.2.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 6.7.2.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication.
(See Section 6.7.2.3 on page 138 for information about this.) Table 24 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK WPA Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2 138 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the ZyXEL Device and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your ZyXEL Device, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the ZyXEL Device. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 6.7.3 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects
(such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. 6.7.4 BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 139 Chapter 6 Wireless and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 33 Basic Service set 6.7.5 MBSSID Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The ZyXEL Devices MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 6.7.5.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs (they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. 140 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 6.7.6 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Chapter 6 Wireless Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 6.7.6.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. 2 3 Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 6.4 on page 131). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the ZyXEL Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 141 Chapter 6 Wireless 6.7.6.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router (referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. 2 Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. 3 Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 6.4 on page 131). 4 Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. 5 If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. 6 Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 142 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 34 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:
WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 6.7.6.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 143 Chapter 6 Wireless The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 35 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WITHIN 2 MINUTES WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION ACTIVATE WPS REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 144 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 6.7.6.4 Example WPS Network Setup Chapter 6 Wireless This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 36 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 37 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 145 Chapter 6 Wireless In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 38 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O C G T I N X I S E SECURITYINFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 6.7.6.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-
PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). 146 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients
(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 147 Chapter 6 Wireless 148 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 7 Home Networking 7.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN DSL 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the LAN IP screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings (Section 7.2 on page 153). Use the DHCP Server screen to configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN (Section 7.3 on page 154). Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP (Section 7.4 on page 156). Use the File Sharing screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 7.5 on page 157). Use the Printer Server screen to enable the print server (Section 7.6 on page 160). P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 149 Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. 7.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. This is known as an Internet Protocol address. Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) allows clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. This ZyXEL Device has a built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. 7.1.2.2 About UPnP How do I know if I'm using UPnP?
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder
(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. 150 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See Section 7.8 on page 165 for examples of installing and using UPnP. 7.1.2.3 About File Sharing User Account This gives you access to the file sharing server. It includes your user name and password. Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network. Shares When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the ZyXEL Device is given a folder, called a share. If a USB hard drive connected to the ZyXEL Device has more than one partition, then each partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a share to be a sub-folder or file on the USB device. File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 151 Chapter 7 Home Networking different file systems. The file sharing feature on your ZyXEL Device supports File Allocation Table (FAT), FAT32, and New Technology File System (NTFS). Common Internet File System The ZyXEL Device uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the ZyXEL Device. CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility). 7.1.2.4 About Printer Server Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers, and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices. Operating System An operating system (OS) is the interface which helps you manage a computer. Common examples are Microsoft Windows, Mac OS or Linux. TCP/IP TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on. Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer, such as a process run by your web browser. When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer, the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for. Supported OSs Your operating system must support TCP/IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW protocol. The following OSs support ZyXEL Devices printer sharing feature. Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE (Second Edition), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Macintosh OS X. 152 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.2 The LAN Setup Screen Click Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen. Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your ZyXEL Device and configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN. Figure 39 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 25 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup LABEL LAN IP Setup IP Address DESCRIPTION IP Subnet Mask DHCP Server State DHCP Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your ZyXEL Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. Select Enable to have your ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to LAN computers and other devices that are DHCP clients. If you select Disable, you need to manually configure the IP addresses of the computers and other devices on your LAN. When DHCP is used, the following fields need to be set. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 153 Chapter 7 Home Networking DESCRIPTION Table 25 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL IP Addressing Values IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size DNS Values DNS Server 1-3 This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool. Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address). Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-
Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. You must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 7.3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. 7.3.1 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the Static DHCP screen. 154 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen. Figure 40 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new static DHCP entry. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP LABEL Add new static lease
Status Host Name MAC Address This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the client host name. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Select the check box in the heading row to automatically select all check boxes or select the check box(es) in each entry to have the ZyXEL Device always assign the selected entry(ies)s IP address(es) to the corresponding MAC address(es) (and host name(s)). You can select up to 128 entries in this table. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table. IP Address Reserve Apply Cancel Refresh If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen, the following screen displays. Figure 41 Static DHCP: Add P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 155 Chapter 7 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 27 Static DHCP: Add LABEL MAC Address IP Address DESCRIPTION Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to exit this screen without saving. Apply Back 7.4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See page 165 for more information on UPnP. Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your ZyXEL Device. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 42 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP LABEL UPnP DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the ZyXEL Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Click Apply to save your changes. Apply 156 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.5 The File Sharing Screen You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your ZyXEL Device with users on your network. The following figure is an overview of the ZyXEL Devices file server feature. Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the ZyXEL Device. Figure 43 File Sharing Overview B C A The ZyXEL Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator. 7.5.1 Before You Begin Make sure the ZyXEL Device is connected to your network and turned on. 1 Connect the USB device to one of the ZyXEL Devices USB ports. Make sure the ZyXEL Device is connected to your network. 2 The ZyXEL Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by ZyXEL Device, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 157 Chapter 7 Home Networking Use this screen to set up file sharing using the ZyXEL Device. To access this screen, click Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing. Figure 44 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing DESCRIPTION Each field is described in the following table. Table 29 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing LABEL Server Configuration File Sharing Services (SMB) Add new share
Select Enable to activate file sharing through the ZyXEL Device. Click this to set up a new share on the ZyXEL Device. Select the check box to make the share available to the network. Otherwise, clear this. This shows whether or not the share is available for sharing. This field displays the share name on the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the path for the share directories (folders) on the ZyXEL Device. These are the directories (folders) on your USB storage device. This field displays information about the share. Click the Edit icon to change the settings of an existing share. Click the Delete icon to delete this share in the list. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Status Share Name Share Path Share Description Modify Apply Cancel 158 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.5.2 Add/Edit File Sharing Use this screen to set up a new share or edit an existing share on the ZyXEL Device. Click Add new share in the File Sharing screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing share. Figure 45 File Sharing: Add/Edit Each field is described in the following table. Table 30 File Sharing: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Volume Select the volume in the USB storage device that you want to add as a share in the ZyXEL Device. Share Path Description Apply Back This field is read-only when you are editing the share. Manually enter the file path for the share, or click the Browse button and select the folder that you want to add as a share. This field is read-only when you are editing the share. You can either enter a short description of the share, or leave this field blank. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 159 Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.6 The Printer Server Screen The ZyXEL Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the ZyXEL Device and then configuring a TCP/IP port on the computers connected to your network. Figure 46 Sharing a USB Printer 7.6.1 Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following:
Your ZyXEL Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network. The USB printer must be connected to your ZyXEL Device. A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer. The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can create a TCP/IP port for printing via the network. Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer. Note: Your printers installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer. Connect your printer to the ZyXEL Device instead. Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your ZyXEL Device. To access this screen, click Network Setting > Home Networking > Printer Server. Figure 47 Network Setting > Home Networking > Printer Server 160 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > Print Server LABEL Printer Server Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the ZyXEL Device share a USB printer. 7.7 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device The actual physical connection determines whether the ZyXEL Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 48 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ZyXEL Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 161 Chapter 7 Home Networking IP Pool Setup The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. LAN TCP/IP The ZyXEL Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the ZyXEL Device. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your ZyXEL Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet 162 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
Chapter 7 Home Networking 10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. ZyXEL Device Print Server Compatible USB Printers The following is a list of USB printer models compatible with the ZyXEL Device print server. Table 32 Compatible USB Printers BRAND Brother MODEL MFC7420 CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON CANON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON BJ F9000 i320 PIXMA MP450 PIXMA MP730 PIXMA MP780 PIXMA MP830 PIXUS ip2500 PIXMA ip4200 PIXMA ip5000 PIXUS 990i CX3500 CX3900 EPL-5800 EPL-6200L P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 163 Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 32 Compatible USB Printers (continued) BRAND EPSON MODEL LP-2500 EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON EPSON HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP LP-8900 RX 510 RX 530 Stylus 830U Stylus 1270 Stylus C43UX Stylus C60 Stylus Color 670 Deskjet 5550 Deskjet 5652 Deskjet 830C Deskjet 845C Deskjet 1125C Deskjet 1180C Deskjet 1220C Deskjet F4185 Laserjet 1022 Laserjet 1200 Laserjet 2200D Laserjet 2420 Color Laserjet 1500L Laserjet 3015 Officejet 4255 Officejet 5510 Officejet 5610 Officejet 7210 Officejet Pro L7380 Photosmart 2610 Photosmart 3110 Photosmart 7150 164 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 32 Compatible USB Printers (continued) BRAND HP MODEL Photosmart 7830 HP HP HP HP IBM LEXMARK LEXMARK OKI SAMSUNG SAMSUNG Photosmart C5280 Photosmart D5160 PSC 1350 PSC 1410 Infoprint 1332 Z55 Z705 B4350 ML-1710 SCX-4016 7.8 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 165 Chapter 7 Home Networking 2 Click the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Figure 49 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication 3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Figure 50 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components 166 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 4 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Chapter 7 Home Networking Next. 5 Restart the computer when prompted. Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Figure 51 Network Connections P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 167 Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Figure 52 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard 168 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Figure 53 Networking Services 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 7.9 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the ZyXEL Device. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the ZyXEL Device. Turn on your computer and the ZyXEL Device. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 169 Chapter 7 Home Networking 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Figure 54 Network Connections 170 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 55 Internet Connection Properties P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 171 Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Figure 56 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Figure 57 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 172 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 58 System Tray Icon 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Figure 59 Internet Connection Status Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the ZyXEL Device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the ZyXEL Device. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 173 Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Figure 60 Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. 174 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 5 Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Figure 61 Network Connections: My Network Places 6 Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the ZyXEL Device. Figure 62 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 175 Chapter 7 Home Networking 176 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Routing 8.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the ZyXEL Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the ZyXEL Devices LAN interface. The ZyXEL Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the ZyXEL Devices default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 63 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 177 Chapter 8 Routing 8.2 Configuring Static Route Use this screen to view and configure IP static routes on the ZyXEL Device. Click Network Setting > Routing to open the following screen. Figure 64 Network Setting > Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network Setting > Routing LABEL Add New Static Route
Active This is the number of an individual static route. This indicates whether the rule is active or not. DESCRIPTION Click this to set up a new static route on the ZyXEL Device. Status A yellow bulb signifies that this static route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this static route is not active. This shows whether the static route is currently in use or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this static route is in use. A gray bulb signifies that this static route is not in use. This is the name that describes or identifies this route. Name Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Gateway Subnet Mask Interface Modify Routing is always based on network number. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the ZyXEL Device. Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the ZyXEL Device. 178 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 8 Routing 8.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Click add new Static Route in the Routing screen or click the Edit icon next to a rule. The following screen appears. Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route. Figure 65 Routing: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Routing: Add/Edit LABEL Active Route Name DESCRIPTION Click this to activate this static route. Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete this static route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here. You can decide if you want to forward packets to a gateway IP address or a bound interface. If you want to configure Gateway IP Address, enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. You can decide if you want to forward packets to a gateway IP address or a bound interface. If you want to configure Bound Interface, select the check box and choose an interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screen. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to exit this screen without saving. Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Bound Interface Apply Back P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 179 Chapter 8 Routing 180 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 9 DNS Route 9.1 Overview DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The ZyXEL Device uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry. After the ZyXEL Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table. In the following example, the DNS server 168.92.5.1 obtained from the WAN interface ptm0.100 is set to be the system DNS server. The DNS server 10.10.23.7 is obtained from the WAN interface ppp1.123. You configure a DNS route for *example.com to have the ZyXEL Device forward DNS requests for the domain name mail.example.com through the WAN interface ppp1.123 to the DNS server 10.10.23.7. Figure 66 Example of DNS Routing Topology LAN WAN ptm0.100 ppp1.123 DNS:168.92.5.1
(Default) sip.service.com mail.example.com DNS:10.10.23.7 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 181 Chapter 9 DNS Route 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The DNS Route screens let you view and configure DNS routes on the ZyXEL Device (Section 9.2 on page 182). 9.2 The DNS Route Screen The DNS Route screens let you view and configure DNS routes on the ZyXEL Device. Click Network Setting > DNS Route to open the DNS Route screen. Figure 67 Network Setting > DNS Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network Setting > DNS Route LABEL Add new DNS route
Status DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. This is the number of an individual DNS route. This shows whether the DNS route is currently in use or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this DNS route is in use. A gray bulb signifies that this DNS route is not in use. Domain Name This is the domain name to which the DNS route applies. WAN Interface This is the WAN interface through which the matched DNS request is Modify routed. Click the Edit icon to configure a DNS route on the ZyXEL Device. Click the Delete icon to remove a DNS route from the ZyXEL Device. 182 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 9 DNS Route 9.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Route Edit Click Add new DNS route in the DNS Route screen or the Edit icon next to an existing DNS route. Use this screen to configure the required information for a DNS route. Figure 68 DNS Route: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 DNS Route: Add/Edit LABEL Active Domain Name Enter the domain name you want to resolve. DESCRIPTION Select this to activate this DNS route. You can use the wildcard character, an * (asterisk) as the left most part of a domain name, such as *.example.com. The ZyXEL Device forwards DNS queries for any domain name ending in example.com to the WAN interface specified in this route. WAN Interface Select a WAN interface through which the matched DNS query is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screen. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to exit this screen without saving. Apply Back P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 183 Chapter 9 DNS Route 184 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.1 Overview This chapter discusses the ZyXEL Devices QoS screens. Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Device to use QoS for traffic management. Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. QoS allows the ZyXEL Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-demand. The ZyXEL Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. Note: The ZyXEL Device has built-in configurations for Voice over IP (IP). The Quality of Service (QoS) feature does not affect VoIP traffic. See Section 10.6 on page 195 for advanced technical information on SIP. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to enable QoS, set the bandwidth, and allow the ZyXEL Device to automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence or packet length (Section 10.2 on page 186). Use the Queue Setup screen to configure QoS queue assignment (Section 10.3 on page 188). P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 185 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Use the Class Setup screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow (Section 10.4 on page 190). Use the Monitor screen to view the ZyXEL Devices QoS-related packet statistics (Section 10.5 on page 194). 10.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. 10.2 The QoS General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable QoS, set the bandwidth, and select to have the ZyXEL Device automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence or packet length. 186 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Click Network Setting > QoS to open the General screen. Figure 69 Network Setting > QoS > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network Setting > QoS > General LABEL Active QoS DESCRIPTION Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by You can give priority to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Enter the amount of bandwidth for the WAN interface that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interface speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps. Setting this number higher than the interfaces actual transmission speed will stop lower priority traffic from being sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth. If you set this number lower than the interfaces actual transmission speed, the ZyXEL Device will not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. Leave this field blank to have the ZyXEL Device set this value automatically. These fields are ignored if upstream traffic matches a class you configured in the Class Setup screen. If you select Ethernet Priority, IP Precedence or Packet Length and traffic does not match a class configured in the Class Setup screen, the ZyXEL Device assigns priority to unmatched traffic based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence or packet length. See Section 10.6.1 on page 195 for more information. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 187 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 37 Network Setting > QoS > General (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 10.3 The Queue Setup Screen Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. Click Network Setting >
QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next. Figure 70 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup LABEL Add new Queue
Status Name Interface This is the index number of this entry. Select the check box to enable the queue. This shows the descriptive name of this queue. This shows the name of the ZyXEL Devices interface through which traffic in this queue passes. This shows the priority of this queue. This shows the weight of this queue. This shows the queue management algorithm used by the ZyXEL Device. This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue. Click the Edit icon to edit the queue. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit
(kbps) Modify 188 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 38 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 10.3.1 Add/Edit a QoS Queue Use this screen to configure a queue. Click Add new queue in the Queue Setup screen or the Edit icon next to an existing queue. Figure 71 Queue Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Queue Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Active Name Interface Priority DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this queue. Enter the descriptive name of this queue. Select the interface to which this queue is applied. Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue. The larger the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested. Select the weight (from 1 to 15) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the ZyXEL Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Weight Rate Limit Apply Back P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 189 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.4 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. You can give different priorities to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen. Figure 72 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new classifier. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup LABEL Add new Classifier Order Status Class Name Classification Criteria This field displays the order number of the classifier. Select the check box to enable the classifier. This is the name of the classifier. This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier. This is the interface through which traffic that matches this classifier is forwarded out. This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier. This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put. Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Forward to DSCP Mark To Queue Modify Apply Cancel 190 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.4.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to an existing classifier to configure it. Figure 73 Class Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 Class Setup: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Class Configuration Active Class Name Select to enable this classifier. Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 191 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 41 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Classification Order DESCRIPTION Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply. Forward to Interface DSCP Mark To Queue Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list. Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table. This field is available only when you select the Ether Type check box in Criteria Configuration-Basic section. If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the DSCP field in the packets. Select a queue that applies to this class. You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already. Criteria Configuration Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification. Basic From Interface Select whether the traffic class comes from the LAN or a wireless interface. Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic. If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type. If you select 8021Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID in the Others section. Ether Type Source MAC Address MAC Mask Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. IP Address IP Subnet Mask Port Range 192 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 41 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Exclude Destination MAC Address MAC Mask IP Address IP Subnet Mask Port Range Exclude Others Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter the destination subnet mask. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. IP Packet Length DSCP TCP ACK Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP or UDP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1504) in the fields provided. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge) flag. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 193 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 41 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DHCP DESCRIPTION This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field, and UDP in the IP Protocol field. Select this option and select a DHCP option. If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Class ID of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. If you select ClientID (DHCP Option 61), enter the Type of the matched traffic and Client ID of the DHCP client. If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter the User Class Data, which is a string that identifies the users category or application type in the matched DHCP packets. If you select VendorSpecificIntro (DHCP Option 125), enter the Enterprise Number of the software of the matched traffic and Vendor Class Data used by all the DHCP clients. Select the service classification of the traffic. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Service Exclude Apply Back 10.5 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the ZyXEL Devices QoS packet statistics, click Network Setting > QoS
> Monitor. The screen appears as shown. Figure 74 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor 194 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor LABEL Monitor Refresh Interval DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen. Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics. Status
Name Pass Rate (bps) Queue Monitor
Name Pass Rate (bps) Drop Rate (bps) This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the WAN interface on the ZyXEL Device. This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully. This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the queue. This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully. This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped. 10.6 QoS Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 10.6.1 IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 43 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). TRAFFIC TYPE Level 6 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 195 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 43 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 5 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA
(Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Typically used for best-effort traffic. Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 0 10.6.2 IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-
bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services
(ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. 10.6.3 DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types. DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. 196 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 197 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 198 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Network Address Translation
(NAT) 11.1 Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 11.2 on page 200). Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client can use (Section 11.3 on page 203). 11.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Inside/Outside and Global/Local Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 199 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. Finding Out More See Section 11.4 on page 204 for advanced technical information on NAT. 11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix E on page 381. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP 200 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide
| 1 | Manual Part 2 | Users Manual | 5.12 MiB | August 05 2013 |
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 75 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 LAN WAN B=192.168.1.34 192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36 11.2.1 The Port Forwarding Screen Click Network Setting > NAT to open the Port Forwarding screen. See Appendix E on page 381 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 76 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 44 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL Add new rule
Status DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new port forwarding rule. This is the index number of the entry. This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. This is the services name. This shows User Defined if you manually added a service. You can change this by clicking the edit icon. This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. This is the first external port number that identifies a service. This is the last external port number that identifies a service. Service Name WAN Interface Start Port End Port P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 201 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) DESCRIPTION This is the first internal port number that identifies a service. Table 44 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued) LABEL Translation Start Port Translation End Port Server IP Address Protocol This is the last internal port number that identifies a service. This is the servers IP address. This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click the Edit icon to edit the port forwarding rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Modify Apply Cancel 11.2.2 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule. Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen. Figure 77 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 45 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit LABEL Service Name DESCRIPTION Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-
2 and so on). WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled. 202 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 45 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Start Port DESCRIPTION Enter the original destination port for the packets. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External End Port field. Enter the last port of the original destination port range. End Port To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above. This shows the port number to which you want the ZyXEL Device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated. This shows the last port of the translated port range. Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here. Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Translation Start Port Translation End Port Server IP Address Protocol Type Apply Back 11.3 The Sessions Screen Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client can use. Click Network Setting > NAT > Sessions to display the following screen. Figure 78 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 203 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 46 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions LABEL MAX NAT Session DESCRIPTION Use this field to set a common limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client computer can have. If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to improve their performance. With heavy peer to peer application use, lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 11.4 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 11.4.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 47 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. Inside This refers to the host on the WAN. Outside This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels Local on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. Global 204 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 11.4.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a Telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers, NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your ZyXEL Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 11.4.3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The ZyXEL Device keeps track of the original addresses P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 205 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 79 How NAT Works LAN 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 SA 192.168.1.10 WAN NAT Table Inside Local IP Address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 Inside Global IP Address IGA 1 IGA 2 IGA 3 IGA 4 SA IGA1 Inside Local Address (ILA) Inside Global Address (IGA) 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 206 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Dynamic DNS 12.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure your ZyXEL Device to use Dynamic DNS. Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in applications such as NetMeeting and CU-SeeMe). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 12.1.1 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 207 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS 12.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the ZyXEL Device. To change your ZyXEL Devices DDNS, click Network Setting > DNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 80 Network Setting > DNS DESCRIPTION The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 48 Network Setting > DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Configuration Active Dynamic DNS Service Provider Dynamic DNS Type Host Name Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider. Type the domain name assigned to your ZyXEL Device by your Dynamic DNS provider. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma
(","). Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. User Name Password Apply Cancel 208 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 13 Firewall 13.1 Overview Use the ZyXEL Device firewall screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your ZyXEL Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:
allows traffic that originates from your LAN and WLAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN and WLAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM
(Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked
(3 and 4). Figure 81 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to enable or disable the ZyXEL Devices firewall
(Section 13.2 on page 211). Use the Services screen to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule (Section 13.3 on page 211). P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 209 Chapter 13 Firewall 13.1.2 What You Need to Know Firewall The ZyXEL Devices firewall feature physically separates the LAN/WLAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks. It is designed to protect against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when activated. The ZyXEL Device's purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The ZyXEL Device can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network. The ZyXEL Device is installed between the LAN/WLAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN. The ZyXEL Device has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to physically separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband (cable or DSL) modem to the Internet. The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. Finding Out More See Section 13.4 on page 213 for advanced technical information on firewall. 210 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 13 Firewall 13.2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable the ZyXEL Devices firewall. Click Security >
Firewall to open the General screen. Figure 82 Security > Firewall > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Firewall DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate the firewall. The ZyXEL Device performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 13.3 The Services Screen Use this screen to enable service blocking and to maintain the list of services you want to block. To access this screen, click Security > Firewall > Services. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 211 Chapter 13 Firewall Note: These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the WAN. Figure 83 Security > Firewall > Services Each field is described in the following table. Table 50 Security > Firewall > Services LABEL LAN-to-WAN Services Blocking Available Services DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate service blocking. This is a list of pre-defined services (destination ports) you may prohibit your LAN computers from using. Select the port you want to block, and click Add to add the port to the Blocked Services field. A custom port is a service that is not available in the pre-defined Available Services list. You must define it using the Type and Port Number fields. See Appendix E on page 381 for some examples of services. This is a list of services (ports) that are inaccessible to computers on your LAN when service blocking is effective. To remove a service from this list, select the service, and click Delete. Select TCP, UDP or TCP and UDP, based on which one the custom port uses. Enter the range of port numbers that defines the service. For example, suppose you want to define the Gnutella service. Select TCP type and enter a port range of 6345-6349. Click this to add the selected service in Available Services to the Blocked Services list. Note that the service is blocked immediately after clicking this. Blocked Services Type Port Number Add 212 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 13 Firewall Table 50 Security > Firewall > Services (continued) LABEL Delete DESCRIPTION Select a service in the Blocked Services, and click this to remove the service from the list. Click this to remove all the services in the Blocked Services list. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Clear All Apply Cancel 13.4 Firewall Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 13.4.1 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 1 Change the default password via web configurator. 2 3 Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way. Limit who can access your ZyXEL Device. 4 Don't enable any local service (such as Telnet or FTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 5 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. 6 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. 13.4.2 Security Considerations Note: Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the ZyXEL Device and your protected network. Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them. Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule:
1 Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet?
For example, if IRC is blocked, are there users that require this service?
P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 213 Chapter 13 Firewall 2 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective?
3 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the Internet to the LAN, Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers. 4 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?
Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens. 214 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 14 MAC Filter 14.1 Overview This chapter discusses MAC address filtering. You can configure the ZyXEL Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filter screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. 14.1.1 What You Need to Know Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 215 Chapter 14 MAC Filter 14.2 The MAC Filter Screen Use the MAC Filter screen to allow wireless clients access to the ZyXEL Device. To change your ZyXEL Devices MAC filter settings, click Security > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 84 Security > MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 51 Security > MAC Filter LABEL MAC Address Filter Set Allow DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate MAC address filtering. This is the index number of the MAC address. Select Allow to permit access to the ZyXEL Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the ZyXEL Device. MAC Address Apply Cancel If you clear this, the MAC Address field for this set clears. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed access to the ZyXEL Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 216 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 15 Certificates 15.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Local Certificate screens to view and import the ZyXEL Devices CA-
signed certificates (Section 15.2 on page 220). Use the Trusted CA screens to save the certificates of trusted CAs to the ZyXEL Device. You can also export the certificates to a computer (Section 15.3 on page 222). 15.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Certification Authorities A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. Public and Private Keys When using public-key cryptology for authentication, each host has two keys. One key is public and can be made openly available; the other key is private and must be kept secure. Public-key encryption in general works as follows. 1 2 Tim wants to send a private message to Jenny. Tim generates a public-private key pair. What is encrypted with one key can only be decrypted using the other. Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 217 Chapter 15 Certificates 3 4 Tim uses his private key to encrypt the message and sends it to Jenny. Jenny receives the message and uses Tims public key to decrypt it. 5 Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to encrypt a message and Tim uses Jennys public key to decrypt the message. The ZyXEL Device uses certificates based on public-key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection. The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection. For example, a VPN tunnel might use the triple DES encryption algorithm. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authoritys public key to verify the certificates. Certification Path A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate. The ZyXEL Device does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked. Certificate Directory Servers Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates. A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL (Certificate Revocation List). The ZyXEL Device can check a peers certificate against a directory servers list of revoked certificates. The framework of servers, software, procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI (public-key infrastructure). Advantages of Certificates Certificates offer the following benefits. The ZyXEL Device only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate. Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never need to transmit private keys. Certificate File Formats The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
218 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates. PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data
(including digital signatures) that may be encrypted. The ZyXEL Device currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate. PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form. Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default. 15.1.3 Verifying a Certificate Before you import a trusted CA or trusted remote host certificate into the ZyXEL Device, you should verify that you have the actual certificate. This is especially true of trusted CA certificates since the ZyXEL Device also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates. You can use a certificates fingerprint to verify it. A certificates fingerprint is a message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithms. The following procedure describes how to check a certificates fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate. 1 Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer. 2 Make sure that the certificate has a .cer or .crt file name extension. Figure 85 Certificates on Your Computer P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 219 Chapter 15 Certificates 3 Double-click the certificates icon to open the Certificate window. Click the Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. Figure 86 Certificate Details 4 Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. The secure method may very based on your situation. Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection. 15.2 Local Certificates Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Devices summary list of certificates and certification requests. You can import the following certificates to your ZyXEL Device:
Web Server - This certificate secures HTTP connections. SIP TLS - This certificate secures VoIP connections. SSH/SCP/SFTP - This certificate secures remote connections. 220 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. Figure 87 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates Chapter 15 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates LABEL Web Server DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the Web Server certificate file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. Type in the location of the SSH/SCP/SFTP certificate file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. Browse Current File Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Cert SSH/SCP/SFTP Browse Current File P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 221 Chapter 15 Certificates Table 52 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates (continued) LABEL Key Type DESCRIPTION This field applies to the SSH/SCP/SFTP certificate. Replace Reset This shows the file format of the current certificate. Click this to replace the certificate(s) and save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to clear your settings. 15.3 Trusted CA Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the ZyXEL Device to accept as trusted. The ZyXEL Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen. Figure 88 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA LABEL Import Certificate Name Subject DESCRIPTION Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. 222 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Table 53 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA (continued) LABEL Type DESCRIPTION This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). Action Click the Delete icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 15.4 Trusted CA Import Click Import Certificate in the Trusted CAs screen to open the Import Certificate screen. You can save a trusted certification authoritys certificate to the ZyXEL Device. Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import the certificate. Figure 89 Trusted CA > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Import LABEL Certificate File Path Browse Apply Back DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. Click Apply to save the certificate on the ZyXEL Device. Click Back to return to the previous screen. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 223 Chapter 15 Certificates 15.5 View Certificate Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authoritys certificate, change the certificates name and set whether or not you want the ZyXEL Device to check a certification authoritys list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority. Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen. Click the View icon to open the View Certificate screen. Figure 90 Trusted CA: View The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Trusted CA: View LABEL Certificate Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces). This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. Certificate Detail You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Click this to return to the previous screen. Back 224 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 16 VoIP 16.1 Overview Use this chapter to:
Connect an analog phone to the ZyXEL Device. Make phone calls over the Internet, as well as the regular phone network. Configure settings such as speed dial. Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls. 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter These screens allow you to configure your ZyXEL Device to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line, and to set up the phones you connect to the ZyXEL Device. Use the SIP Service Provider screen to configure the SIP server information, QoS for VoIP calls, the numbers for certain phone functions (Section 16.3 on page 231). Use the SIP Account screen to set up information about your SIP account, control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device use and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device (Section 16.3 on page 231). Use the Common screen to configure RFC3262 support on the ZyXEL Device
(Section 16.4 on page 236). Use the Phone Device screen to control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device use (Section 16.6 on page 239). Use the Region screen to change settings that depend on the country you are in (Section 16.7 on page 241). Use the Call Rule screen to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers (Section 16.9 on page 243). Use the FXO screen to set up the PSTN line used to make regular phone calls which do not use the Internet (Section 16.9 on page 243). P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 225 Chapter 16 VoIP You dont necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account. In fact, if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen, it is usually best to leave it at its default setting. 16.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP. IP is the Internet Protocol, which is the message-
carrying standard the Internet runs on. So, Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals (speech) over the Internet (or another network that uses the Internet Protocol). SIP SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol. SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device (like a computer or the ZyXEL Device) send messages to another. In VoIP, these messages are about phone calls over the network. For example, when you dial a number on your ZyXEL Device, it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device (the number you dialed) to take part in the call. SIP Accounts A SIP account is a type of VoIP account. It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet. When you set the ZyXEL Device to use your SIP account to make calls, the ZyXEL Device is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet. Strictly speaking, you dont need a SIP account. It is possible for one SIP device
(like the ZyXEL Device) to call another without involving a SIP service provider. However, the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances. Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup - figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another. Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection (VAD) detects whether or not speech is present. This lets the ZyXEL Device reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking. 226 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD, the ZyXEL Device generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking. The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection. Echo Cancellation G.168 is an ITU-T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. Use this screen to maintain basic information about each SIP account. You can also enable and disable each SIP account, configure the volume, echo cancellation and VAD (Voice Activity Detection) settings for each individual phone port on the ZyXEL Device. How to Find Out More See Chapter 3 on page 37 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario. See Section 16.10 on page 244 for advanced technical information on SIP. 16.1.3 Before You Begin Before you can use these screens, you need to have a VoIP account already set up. If you dont have one yet, you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet. You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready, before you start to configure the ZyXEL Device. 16.2 The SIP Service Provider Screen Use this screen to configure the SIP server information, QoS for VoIP calls, the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan. Click VoIP > SIP to open the SIP Service Provider screen. Note: Click more... to see all the fields in the screen. You dont necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account. Click hide more to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 227 Chapter 16 VoIP Figure 91 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider 228 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider LABEL SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection DESCRIPTION Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you configure in this screen. If you change this field, the screen automatically refreshes. If you want to configure a new service provider, select Add New. General SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provider Name SIP Local Port SIP Server Address SIP Server Port REGISTER Server Address REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domain RTP Port Range Start Port End Port Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to use this SIP provider. Clear it if you do not want the ZyXEL Device to use this SIP provider. Enter the name of your SIP service provider. Enter the ZyXEL Devices listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service provider. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy, redirect or register server. Enter the SIP servers listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. Enter the SIP register servers listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field. Enter the SIP service domain name. In the full SIP URI, this is the part after the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters. Enter the listening port number(s) for RTP traffic, if your VoIP service provider gave you this information. Otherwise, keep the default values. To enter one port number, enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields. To enter a range of ports, enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field. enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 229 Chapter 16 VoIP Table 56 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued) LABEL DTMF Mode DESCRIPTION Control how the ZyXEL Device handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons. You should use the same mode your VoIP service provider uses. RFC2833 - send the DTMF tones in RTP packets. PCM - send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream. This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression
(like G.711). Codecs that use compression (like G.729 and G.726) can distort the tones. SIP INFO - send the DTMF tones in SIP messages. Select the transport layer protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP) used for SIP. This field controls how the ZyXEL Device handles fax messages. Select this if the ZyXEL Device should use G.711 to send fax messages. The peer devices must also use G.711. Select this if the ZyXEL Device should send fax messages as UDP or TCP/IP packets through IP networks. This provides better quality, but it may have inter-operability problems. The peer devices must also use T.38. Select this if your VoIP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls. This allows the ZyXEL Device to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG. Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the ZyXEL Device to keep it from re-translating the IP address (since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server). Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server. Enter the SIP outbound proxy servers listening port, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. Enter the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number for SIP message transmissions. The ZyXEL Device creates Class of Service (CoS) priority tags with this number to SIP traffic that it transmits. Enter the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number for RTP voice transmissions. The ZyXEL Device creates Class of Service (CoS) priority tags with this number to RTP traffic that it transmits. Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the SIP register server before it is deleted. The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to re-register your SIP account when one-half of this time has passed. (The SIP register server might have a different expiration.) Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device waits before it tries again to register the SIP account, if the first try failed or if there is no response. Transport Type Transport Type FAX Option G711 Fax Passthrough T38 Fax Relay Outbound Proxy Enable Server Address Server Port QoS Tag SIP TOS Priority Setting RTP TOS Priority Setting Timer Setting Expiration Duration Register Re-
send timer Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. 230 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Table 56 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued) LABEL Min-SE DESCRIPTION Enter the minimum number of seconds the ZyXEL Device lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions. This field is the shortest expiration time that the ZyXEL Device accepts. Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it makes the phone call. The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers. Bound Interface Name Bound Interface Name If you select LAN or AnyWAN, the ZyXEL Device automatically activates the VoIP service when any LAN or WAN connection is up. If you select MultiWAN, you also need to select the pre-configured WAN connections. The VoIP service is activated only when the selected WAN connection is up. Select this check box if you want to redirect the outgoing calls to the PSTN line (that do not use the Internet) when your SIP account is unregistered or SIP call has failed. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. PSTN Fail Over
(L models only) Apply Cancel 16.3 The SIP Account Screen The ZyXEL Device uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming calls destination number matches your SIP accounts SIP number. In order to make or receive a VoIP call, you need to enable and configure a SIP account, and map it to a phone port. The SIP account contains information that allows your ZyXEL Device to connect to your VoIP service provider. See Section 16.6 on page 239 for how to map a SIP account to a phone port. To access the following screen, click VoIP > SIP > SIP Account. Figure 92 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 231 Chapter 16 VoIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account LABEL Add new SIP Account
Active DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new SIP account. This is the index number of the entry. This shows whether the SIP account is activated or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this SIP account is activated. A gray bulb signifies that this SIP account is activated. This shows the name of the SIP account. This shows the SIP number. Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account. SIP Account Account No. Modify Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP account from the ZyXEL Device. 232 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP 16.3.1 Add/Edit SIP Account You can configure a new SIP account or edit one. To access this screen, click Add new SIP Account in the SIP Account screen or the Edit icon next to an existing account. Figure 93 SIP Account: Add/Edit P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 233 Chapter 16 VoIP Each field is described in the following table. Table 58 SIP Account: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you configure in this screen. This field is view-only if you are editing the SIP account. General SIP Account SIP Account Number Authentication Username Password URL Type URL Type Voice Features Primary Compression Type Secondary Compression Type Third Compression Type Speaking Volume Control Select the Active SIP Account check box if you want the ZyXEL Device to use this account. Clear it if you do not want the ZyXEL Device to use this account. Enter your SIP number. In the full SIP URI, this is the part before the @
symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters. Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. Enter the password for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the ZyXEL Device sends the SIP number. SIP - include the SIP service domain name. TEL - do not include the SIP service domain name. Select the type of voice coder/decoder (codec) that you want the ZyXEL Device to use. G.711 provides higher voice quality but requires more bandwidth (64 kbps). G.711MuLaw is typically used in North America and Japan. G.711ALaw is typically used in Europe. G.729 only requires 8 kbps. G.726-32 operates at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps. G.722 operates at 48, 56 and 64 kbps.The ZyXEL Device must use the same codec as the peer. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on a codec. Select the ZyXEL Devices first choice for voice coder/decoder. Select the ZyXEL Devices second choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only want the ZyXEL Device to accept the first choice. Select the ZyXEL Devices third choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only want the ZyXEL Device to accept the first or second choice. Enter the loudness that the ZyXEL Device uses for speech that it sends to the peer device. Minimum is the quietest, and Maximum is the loudest. 234 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Table 58 SIP Account: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the loudness that the ZyXEL Device uses for speech that it receives from the peer device. Listening Volume Control Minimum is the quietest, and Maximum is the loudest. Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. Active G.168
(Echo Cancellation) Active VAD
(Voice Active Detector) Call Features Send Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone Select this if the ZyXEL Device should stop transmitting when you are not speaking. This reduces the bandwidth the ZyXEL Device uses. Active Call Transfer Active Call Waiting Call Waiting Reject Timer Active Unconditional Forward Active Busy Forward Active No Answer Forward No Answer Ring Time Apply Back calls. Clear this if you do not want to send identification. Select this to enable call transfer on the ZyXEL Device. This allows you to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. Select this to enable call waiting on the ZyXEL Device. This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number. Specify a time of seconds that the ZyXEL Device waits before rejecting the second call if you do not answer it. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to forward all incoming calls to the specified phone number. Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the phone port is busy. Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right. If you have call waiting, the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the call is unanswered. (See No Answer Time.) Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right. This field is used by the Active No Answer Forward feature. Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device should wait for you to answer an incoming call before it considers the call is unanswered. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 235 Chapter 16 VoIP 16.4 The SIP Common Screen Use the Common screen to configure RFC3262 support on the ZyXEL Device. To access the following screen, click VoIP > SIP > Common. Figure 94 VoIP > SIP > Common Each field is described in the following table. Table 59 VoIP > SIP > Common LABEL RFC Support PRACK (RFC 3262) DESCRIPTION RFC 3262 defines a mechanism to provide reliable transmission of SIP provisional response messages, which convey information on the processing progress of the request. This uses the option tag 100rel and the Provisional Response ACKnowledgement (PRACK) method. Select Supported or Required to have the ZyXEL Device include a SIP Require/Supported header field with the option tag 100rel in all INVITE requests. When the ZyXEL Device receives a SIP response message indicating that the phone it called is ringing, the ZyXEL Device sends a PRACK message to have both sides confirm the message is received. If you select Supported, the peer device supports the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably. If you select Required, the peer device requires the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving. Apply Cancel 16.5 Multiple SIP Accounts You can set up two SIP accounts on your ZyXEL Device and your ZyXEL Device is equipped with two phone ports. By default your ZyXEL Device uses SIP account 1 with both phone ports for outgoing calls, and it uses SIP accounts 1 and 2 for incoming calls. With this setting, you always use SIP account 1 for your outgoing calls and you cannot distinguish which SIP account the calls are coming in through. If you want to control the use of different dialing plans for accounting purposes or other reasons, you need to configure your phone ports in order to control which SIP account you are using when placing or receiving calls. 236 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP 16.5.1 Outgoing Calls The following figure represents the default behavior of your ZyXEL Device when two SIP accounts are configured and you are using two phones. When you place a call from phone port 1 or phone port 2, the ZyXEL Device will use SIP account 1. Figure 95 Outgoing Calls: Default PHONE 1 SIP 1 SIP 2 PHONE 2 In the next example, phone port 1 is configured to use SIP account 1 and phone port 2 is configured to use SIP account 2. In this case, every time you place a call through phone port 1, you are using your SIP account 1. Similarly, every time you place a call through phone port 2, you are using your SIP account 2. To apply these configuration changes you need to configure the Phone Device screen. See Section 16.6 on page 239. Figure 96 Outgoing Calls: Individual Configuration PHONE 1 SIP 1 SIP 2 PHONE 2 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 237 Chapter 16 VoIP 16.5.2 Incoming Calls The following example shows the default behavior of your ZyXEL Device for incoming calls when two SIP accounts are configured and you are using two phones. When a call comes in from your SIP account 1, the phones connected to both phone port 1 and phone port 2 ring. Similarly, when a call comes in from your SIP account 2, the phones connected to both phone port 1 and phone port 2 ring. In either case you are not sure which SIP account the call is coming from. Figure 97 Incoming Calls: Default PHONE 1 SIP 1 SIP 2 PHONE 2 In the next example, phone port 1 is configured to use SIP account 1 and phone port 2 is configured to use SIP account 2 for incoming calls. In this case, every time you receive a call from your SIP account 1, the phone connected to phone port 1 rings. Similarly, every time you receive a call from your SIP account 2, 238 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP phone port 2 rings. To apply these configuration changes you need to configure the Phone Device screen. See Section 16.6 on page 239. Figure 98 Incoming Calls: Individual Configuration PHONE 1 SIP 1 SIP 2 PHONE 2 16.6 The Phone Device Screen Use this screen to control which SIP accounts and PSTN line each phone uses. Click VoIP > Phone to access the Phone Device screen. Figure 99 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device LABEL
Phone ID Outgoing SIP Number Modify DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. This is the phone device number. This is the outgoing SIP number of the phone device. Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 239 Chapter 16 VoIP 16.6.1 Edit Phone Device You can edit an SIP account by clicking the Edit icon next to an SIP account entry. You cannot edit the account if it is not activated. Go to VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Edit to activate an SIP account (see Section 16.3.1 on page 233 for more information). Figure 100 Phone Device: Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Phone Device: Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call SIP Account Select the SIP account you want to use when making outgoing calls with the analog phone connected to this phone port. This shows the SIP account number. SIP Number SIP Account(s) to Receive Incoming Call SIP Account Select a SIP account if you want to receive phone calls for the selected SIP account on this phone port. If you select more than one SIP account for incoming calls, there is no way to distinguish between them when you receive phone calls. If you do not select a source for incoming calls, you cannot receive any calls on this phone port. This shows the SIP account number. SIP Number FXO Interface to Receive Incoming Call Enable Select this if you want to receive phone calls from the PSTN line (that do not use the Internet) on this phone port. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving. Apply Back 240 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP 16.7 The Region Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the ZyXEL Device is in. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Region. Figure 101 VoIP > Phone > Region Each field is described in the following table. Table 62 VoIP > Phone > Region LABEL Region Settings Select the place in which the ZyXEL Device is located. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. DESCRIPTION 16.8 The Call Rule Screen Use this screen to add, edit, or remove speed-dial numbers for outgoing calls. Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers. You also have to create speed-dial entries if you want to call SIP numbers that contain letters. Once you have configured a speed dial rule, you can use a shortcut
(the speed dial number, #01 for example) on your phone's keypad to call the phone number. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 241 Chapter 16 VoIP To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Call Rule. Figure 102 VoIP > Phone > Call Rule Each field is described in the following table. Table 63 VoIP > Phone > Call Rule LABEL Speed Dial
Number DESCRIPTION Use this section to create or edit speed-dial entries. Select the speed-dial number you want to use for this phone number. Enter the SIP number you want the ZyXEL Device to call when you dial the speed-dial number. Enter a short description to identify the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters. Click this to use the information in the Speed Dial section to update the Speed Dial Phone Book section. Use this section to look at all the speed-dial entries and to erase them. This field displays the speed-dial number you should dial to use this entry. This field displays the SIP number the ZyXEL Device calls when you dial the speed-dial number. This field displays a short description of the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number. Use this field to edit or erase the speed-dial entry. Description Add Phone Book
Number Description Modify Click the Edit icon to copy the information for this speed-dial entry into the Speed Dial section, where you can change it. Click Add when you finish editing to change the configurations. Click the Delete icon to erase this speed-dial entry. 242 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Table 63 VoIP > Phone > Call Rule (continued) LABEL Clear Cancel DESCRIPTION Click this to erase all the speed-dial entries. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. 16.9 The FXO Screen (L Models Only) With PSTN line you can make and receive regular PSTN phone calls. Use a prefix number to make a regular call. When the device does not have power, you can make regular calls without dialing a prefix number. When the ZyXEL Device does not have power, only the phone connected to the PHONE port1 can be used for making calls. Ensure you know which phone this is, so that in case of emergency you can make outgoing calls. Use the FXO screen to set up the PSTN line you use to make regular phone calls which do not use the Internet. To access this screen, click VoIP > FXO. Figure 103 VoIP > FXO Each field is described in the following table. Table 64 VoIP > FXO LABEL Pre-Fix For FXO Outgoing Call Pre-Fix Number Enter 1 - 7 numbers you dial before you dial the phone number, if you DESCRIPTION want to make a regular phone call while one of your SIP accounts is registered. These numbers tell the ZyXEL Device that you want to make a regular phone call. SIP Fail Over P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 243 Chapter 16 VoIP Table 64 VoIP > FXO (continued) LABEL Force to SIP if PSTN un-
plugged DESCRIPTION Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device redirect outgoing calls to the registered SIP account if the ZyXEL Device is not connected to the PSTN network. When you try to make a PSTN call, but the PSTN port on the ZyXEL Device is unplugged, the ZyXEL Device uses the phone ports registered SIP account to make the call. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 16.10 Technical Reference This section contains background material relevant to the VoIP screens. 16.10.1 VoIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol. This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit-switched telephone network. You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail. Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP) companies provide VoIP service. Circuit-switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second (Kbps) in each direction to handle a telephone call. VoIP can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth. 16.10.2 SIP The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions. The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling. SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit-
switched telephone networks. SIP Identities A SIP account uses an identity (sometimes referred to as a SIP address). A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier). A SIP account's URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the way an e-mail 244 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP address identifies an e-mail account. The format of a SIP identity is SIP-
Number@SIP-Service-Domain. SIP Number The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the @ symbol. A SIP number can use letters like in an e-mail address (johndoe@your-ITSP.com for example) or numbers like a telephone number (1122334455@VoIP-provider.com for example). SIP Service Domain The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI. For example, if the SIP address is 1122334455@VoIP-provider.com, then VoIP-provider.com is the SIP service domain. SIP Registration Each ZyXEL Device is an individual SIP User Agent (UA). To provide voice service, it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers. A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents, as well as its current IP address (for the routing of incoming SIP requests). After successful registration, the SIP server knows that the users (identified by their dedicated SIP URIs) are represented by the UA, and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent. Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client (UAC) running in the VoIP gateway (the ZyXEL Device). The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER message, as well as the relevant user and authorization data. A SIP registration has a limited lifespan. The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan. If it does not do so, the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar's database and the connection broken. The ZyXEL Device attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on. When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled, the ZyXEL Device attempts to register the port immediately. Authorization Requirements SIP registrations (and subsequent SIP requests) require a username and password for authorization. These credentials are validated via a challenge /
P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 245 Chapter 16 VoIP response system using the HTTP digest mechanism (as detailed in RFC3261, "SIP:
Session Initiation Protocol"). SIP Servers SIP is a client-server protocol. A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests. A SIP server responds to the SIP requests. When you use SIP to make a VoIP call, it originates at a client and terminates at a server. A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone. One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server. SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls. This means that SIP can be used for peer-to-peer communications even though it is a client-server protocol. In the following figure, either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call. A and B can also both act as a SIP user agent to receive the call. Figure 104 SIP User Agent A SIP Proxy Server B A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server. In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C. 1 The client device (A in the figure) sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server B. 246 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C. Figure 105 SIP Proxy Server B Chapter 16 VoIP 1 2 A SIP Redirect Server C A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests, translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request. Then the client device that originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server. Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests. In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C. 1 Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server B. 2 The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with Cs IP address (or domain name). P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 247 Chapter 16 VoIP 3 Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C. Figure 106 SIP Redirect Server 1 3 A 2 B C SIP Register Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity-to-IP address (or domain name) mapping. The register server checks your user name and password when you register. RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP, the RTP (Real time Transport Protocol) is used to handle voice data transfer. See RFC 3550 for details on RTP. Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits. SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call. A calls B. Table 65 SIP Call Progression A 1. INVITE B 2. Ringing 3. OK 4. ACK 248 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Table 65 SIP Call Progression (continued) B A 5.Dialogue (voice traffic) 6. BYE 7. OK 1 A sends a SIP INVITE request to B. This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call. 2 B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing. 3 B sends an OK response after the call is answered. 4 A then sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call. 5 Now A and B exchange voice media (talk). 6 After talking, A hangs up and sends a BYE request. 7 B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated. Voice Coding A codec (coder/decoder) codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals. The ZyXEL Device supports the following codecs. G.711 is a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) waveform codec. PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples. G.711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth. G.726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM (ADPCM) waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion. ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples. The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction, the less space needed to describe it. G.726 operates at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps. G.729 is an Analysis-by-Synthesis (AbS) hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds. G.729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 249 Chapter 16 VoIP PSTN Call Setup Signaling Dual-Tone MultiFrequency (DTMF) signaling uses pairs of frequencies (one lower frequency and one higher frequency) to set up calls. It is also known as Touch Tone. Each of the keys on a DTMF telephone corresponds to a different pair of frequencies. Pulse dialing sends a series of clicks to the local phone office in order to dial numbers.3 MWI (Message Waiting Indication) Enable Message Waiting Indication (MWI) enables your phone to give you a messagewaiting (beeping) dial tone when you have a voice message(s). Your VoIP service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842. 16.10.3 Quality of Service (QoS) Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real-
time multimedia applications. Type of Service (ToS) Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS (Type of Service) values at the data source (for example, at the ZyXEL Device) so a server can decide the best method of delivery, that is the least cost, fastest route and so on. DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCP) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.4 3. 4. The ZyXEL Device does not support pulse dialing at the time of writing. The ZyXEL Device does not support DiffServ at the time of writing. 250 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. Figure 107 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field DSCP
(6-bit) Unused
(2-bit) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. VLAN Tagging Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Only stations within the same group can communicate with each other. Your ZyXEL Device can add IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID tags to voice frames that it sends to the network. This allows the ZyXEL Device to communicate with a SIP server that is a member of the same VLAN group. Some ISPs use the VLAN tag to identify voice traffic and give it priority over other traffic. 16.10.4 Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold, call waiting, and call transfer. are generally available from your VoIP service provider. The ZyXEL Device supports the following services:
Call Hold Call Waiting Making a Second Call Call Transfer Three-Way Conference P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 251 Chapter 16 VoIP Internal Calls Do not Disturb Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device's phone ports, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider. The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time (a few hundred milliseconds) before releasing it. On newer telephones, there should be a "flash"
key (button) that generates the signal electronically. If the flash key is not available, you can tap (press and immediately release) the hook by hand to achieve the same effect. However, using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise. With manual tapping, if the duration is too long, it may be interpreted as hanging up by the ZyXEL Device. You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key. Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below. After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command time-out (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-
command, the current operation will be aborted. Table 66 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-
DESCRIPTION COMMAND Flash Flash Flash Flash 0 1 2 Flash Flash 3
*98#
Put a current call on hold to place a second call. Switch back to the call (if there is no second call). Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer. Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold. 1. Switch back and forth between two calls. 2. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call. 3. Separate the current three-way conference call into two individual calls (one is on-line, the other is on hold). Create three-way conference connection. Transfer the call to another phone. 252 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 16 VoIP European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key. If you have another call, press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold. Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line. Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold. If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring. European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number. If there is a second call to a telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Take one of the following actions. Reject the second call. Press the flash key and then press 0. Disconnect the first call and answer the second call. Either press the flash key and press 1, or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings. Put the first call on hold and answer the second call. Press the flash key and then 2. European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer a call (that you have answered) to another phone number. 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold. 2 When you hear the dial tone, dial *98# followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. to operate the Intercom. 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone. European Three-Way Conference Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 253 Chapter 16 VoIP 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone, press the flash key to put the call on hold and get a dial tone. 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call. 3 When the second call is answered, press the flash key and press 3 to create a three-way conversation. 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection. 5 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (one is on-line, the other is on hold), press the flash key and press 2. 254 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 17 Logs 17.1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the ZyXEL Device log and then display the logs or have the ZyXEL Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server. Note: The ZyXEL Devices log feature is only for Voice over IP (VoIP). 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Phone Log screen to view phone logs and alert messages (Section 17.2 on page 255). Use The VoIP Call History screen to view the details of the calls performed on the ZyXEL Device (Section 17.3 on page 256). 17.2 The Phone Log Screen Click System Monitor > Log to open the Phone Log screen. Use this screen to view phone logs and alert messages. You can select the type of log and level of severity to display. Figure 108 System Monitor > Log > Phone Log P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 255 Chapter 17 Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 67 System Monitor > Log > Phone Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a category of logs to view from the drop-down list box. select All Logs to view all logs. Select the severity level that you want to view. Click this to renew the log screen. Click this to delete all the logs. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server. This field states the reason for the log. Level Refresh Clear Logs
Time Level Message 17.3 The VoIP Call History Screen Click System Monitor > Log > Call History to open the VoIP Call History screen. Use this screen to see the details of the calls performed on the ZyXEL Device. Figure 109 System Monitor > Log > Call History The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 68 System Monitor > Log > Call History LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a category of call records to view from the drop-down list box. select All Call History to view all call records. Click this to renew the log screen. Click this to delete all the logs. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the call was recorded. This field displays the phone number you used to make or receive this call. This field displays the phone number you called or from which this call is made. Refresh Clear Logs
Time Local Number Peer Number 256 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 17 Logs Table 68 System Monitor > Log > Call History LABEL Interface Duration DESCRIPTION This field displays the type of the call. This field displays how long the call lasted. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 257 Chapter 17 Logs 258 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 18 System Monitor 18.1 Overview Use the System Monitor screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN, LAN interfaces, NAT, and 3G backup. 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 18.2 on page 260) . Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 18.3 on page 261). Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the ZyXEL Devices client(s)
(Section 18.4 on page 262). Use the 3G Backup screen to view the 3G connection traffic statistics (Section 18.5 on page 262). Use the VoIP Status screen to view the VoIP traffic statistics (Section 18.6 on page 263). P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 259 Chapter 18 System Monitor 18.2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. You can view the WAN traffic statistics in this screen. Figure 110 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 69 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN LABEL Status DESCRIPTION This shows the number of bytes received and sent through the WAN interface of the ZyXEL Device. Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen from the drop-down list box. This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected. Refresh Interval Connected Interface Packets Sent Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Packets Received Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 260 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 18 System Monitor 18.3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. You can view the LAN traffic statistics in this screen. Figure 111 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 70 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN LABEL Refresh Interval Interface Bytes Sent Bytes Received Interface Sent (Packet) DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen from the drop-down list box. This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Received (Packet) Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 261 Chapter 18 System Monitor 18.4 The NAT Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT to open the following screen. You can view the NAT status of the ZyXEL Devices client(s) in this screen. Figure 112 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 71 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT LABEL Refresh Interval Device Name IP Address MAC Address No. of Open Session DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen from the drop-down list box. This shows the name of the client. This shows the IP address of the client. This shows the MAC address of the client. This shows the number of NAT sessions used by the client. 18.5 The 3G Backup Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > 3G Backup to open the following screen. You can view the 3G connection traffic statistics in this screen. Figure 113 System Monitor > Traffic Status > 3G Backup 262 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 18 System Monitor The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 72 System Monitor > Traffic Status > 3G backup LABEL Status DESCRIPTION This shows the number of bytes received and sent through the 3G interface of the ZyXEL Device. Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen from the drop-down list box. This shows the name of the 3G connection interface that is currently connected. Refresh Interval Connected Interface Packets Sent Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Packets Received Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 18.6 The VoIP Status Screen Click System Monitor > VoIP Status to open the following screen. You can view the VoIP traffic statistics in this screen. Figure 114 System Monitor > VoIP Status P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 263 Chapter 18 System Monitor The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 73 System Monitor > VoIP Status LABEL Refresh Interval SIP Status Account Registration DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen from the drop-down list box. This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account. You can change this in the Status screen. Registered - The SIP account is registered with a SIP server. Not Registered - The last time the ZyXEL Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server, the attempt failed. The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the ZyXEL Device or when you activate it. Inactive - The SIP account is not active. You can activate it in VoIP >
SIP > SIP Account. This field displays the last time you successfully registered the SIP account. The field is blank if you never successfully registered this account. This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account. You can change these in the VoIP > SIP screens. This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for the SIP account. This field displays the last number that called the SIP account. The field is blank if no number has ever dialed the SIP account. This field displays the last number the SIP account called. The field is blank if the SIP account has never dialed a number. This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device. This field displays how long the current call has lasted. This field displays the current state of the phone call. Idle - There are no current VoIP calls, incoming calls or outgoing calls being made. Dial - The callees phone is ringing. Ring - The phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call. Process - There is a VoIP call in progress. DISC - The callees line is busy, the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook. This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone port. This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port. Last Registration URI Message Waiting Last Incoming Number Last Outgoing Number Call Status Account Duration Status Codec Peer Number Phone Status 264 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 18 System Monitor Table 73 System Monitor > VoIP Status (continued) LABEL Account Outgoing Number Incoming Number DESCRIPTION This field displays the phone accounts of the ZyXEL Device. This field displays the SIP number that you use to make calls on this phone port. This field displays the SIP number that you use to receive calls on this phone port. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 265 Chapter 18 System Monitor 266 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 19 User Account 19.1 Overview You can configure system password for different user accounts in the User Account screen. 19.2 The User Account Screen Use the User Account screen to configure system password. Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen. Figure 115 Maintenance > User Account The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Maintenance > User Account LABEL User Name DESCRIPTION You can configure the password for the admin or user account . Select admin or user from the drop-down list box. Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Old Password New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the ZyXEL Device. Type the new password again for confirmation. Retype to Confirm P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 267 Chapter 19 User Account Table 74 Maintenance > User Account (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 268 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 20 Remote MGMT 20.1 Overview Remote MGMT allows you to manage your ZyXEL Device from a remote location through the following interfaces:
LAN and WLAN WAN only Note: The ZyXEL Device is managed using the web configurator. 20.1.1 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter TR-064 TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the username and password. SSH/SCP/SFTP Secure Shell (SSH) is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network. The following file transfer methods use SSH:
Secure Copy (SC) is a secure way of transferring files between computers. It uses port 22. SSH File Transfer Protocol or Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) is an old way of transferring files between computers. It uses port 22. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 269 Chapter 20 Remote MGMT 20.2 The Remote MGMT Screen Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access which ZyXEL Device interface. Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT to open the following screen. Figure 116 Maintenance > Remote MGMT The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 75 Maintenance > Remote MGMT LABEL Services LAN/WLAN DESCRIPTION This is the service you may use to access the ZyXEL Device. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the LAN and WLAN. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the WAN. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. WAN Port Apply Cancel 270 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 21 System 21.1 Overview You can configure system settings, including the host name, domain name and the inactivity time-out interval in the System screen. 21.1.1 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Domain Name This is a network address that identifies the owner of a network connection. For example, in the network address www.zyxel.com/support/files, the domain name is www.zyxel.com. 21.2 The System Screen Use the System screen to configure the systems host name, domain name, and inactivity time-out interval. The Host Name is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name". Find the system name of your Windows computer. In Windows XP, click start, My Computer, View system information and then click the Computer Name tab. Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the ZyXEL Device System Name. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 271 Chapter 21 System Click Maintenance > System to open the following screen. Figure 117 Maintenance > System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Maintenance > System LABEL Host Name DESCRIPTION Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. It is recommended you enter your computers Computer name in this field. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes - and underscores "_" are accepted. Domain Name Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name. Type how many minutes a management session (either via the web configurator) can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh. Administrator Inactivity Timer Apply Cancel 272 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 22 Time Setting 22.1 Overview You can configure the systems time and date in the Time Setting screen. 22.2 The Time Setting Screen To change your ZyXEL Devices time and date, click Maintenance > Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Devices time based on your local time zone. Figure 118 Maintenance > Time Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 77 Maintenance > System > Time Setting LABEL Current Date/Time Current Time Current Date Time and Date Setup This field displays the time of your ZyXEL Device. This field displays the date of your ZyXEL Device. DESCRIPTION P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 273 Chapter 22 Time Setting Table 77 Maintenance > System > Time Setting (continued) LABEL Time Protocol DESCRIPTION This shows the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the ZyXEL Device. Enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Time Server Address Time Zone Time Zone Daylight Savings Start Date End Date Apply Reset Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Click Apply to save your changes. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. 274 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Log Setting 23.1 Overview You can configure where the ZyXEL Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device records in the Log Setting screen. 23.2 The Log Setting Screen To change your ZyXEL Devices log settings, click Maintenance > Log Setting. The screen appears as shown. Figure 119 Maintenance > Log Setting P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 275 Chapter 23 Log Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 78 Maintenance > Log Setting LABEL Syslog Logging Syslog Server DESCRIPTION The ZyXEL Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Select the Enable check box to enable syslog logging. Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs. Enter the port number used by the syslog server. UDP Port Active Log and Select Level Log Category Log Level Select the categories of logs that you want to record. Select the severity level of logs that you want to record. If you want to record all logs, select ALL. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 276 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 24 Firmware Upgrade 24.1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your ZyXEL Device. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device. 24.2 The Firmware Upgrade Screen Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Do NOT turn off the ZyXEL Device while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 120 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL Current Firmware Version File Path DESCRIPTION This is the present Firmware version. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 277 Chapter 24 Firmware Upgrade Table 79 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade (continued) LABEL Browse... DESCRIPTION Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Upload After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the ZyXEL Device again. Figure 121 Firmware Uploading The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 122 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, an error screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen. Figure 123 Error Message 278 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 25 Backup/Restore 25.1 Overview The Backup/Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. 25.2 The Backup/Restore Screen Click Maintenance > Backup/Restore. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 124 Maintenance > Backup/Restore Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the ZyXEL Devices current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your ZyXEL Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the ZyXEL Devices current configuration to your computer. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 279 Chapter 25 Backup/Restore Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your ZyXEL Device. Table 80 Restore Configuration LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Browse... Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must Upload Reset decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. Click this to reset your device settings back to the factory default. Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while configuration file upload is in progress. After the ZyXEL Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 125 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you restore the default configuration, you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address
(192.168.1.1). See Appendix B on page 317 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. If the upload was not successful, an error screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen. 280 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 25 Backup/Restore Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the ZyXEL Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. Figure 126 Reset Warning Message Figure 127 Reset In Process Message You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your ZyXEL Device. Refer to Section 1.7 on page 28 for more information on the RESET button. 25.3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the ZyXEL Device hangs, for example. Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click the Reboot button to have the ZyXEL Device reboot. This does not affect the ZyXEL Device's configuration. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 281 Chapter 25 Backup/Restore 282 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 26 Diagnostic 26.1 Overview You can use different diagnostic methods to test a connection and see the detailed information. These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the ZyXEL Device. 26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Ping screen to ping an IP address and see the ping statistics (Section 26.2 on page 283). Use the DSL Line screen to check or reset your DSL connection (Section 26.3 on page 284). 26.2 The Ping Screen Use this screen to ping an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic to open the Ping screen shown next. Figure 128 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 283 Chapter 26 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 81 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping LABEL Ping DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection. Click Ping and the ping statistics will show in the diagnostic . 26.3 The DSL Line Screen Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line to open the screen shown next. Figure 129 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line 284 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 26 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 82 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line ITEM ATM Status DESCRIPTION Click this button to view your DSL connections Asynchronous Transfer Mode
(ATM) statistics. ATM is a networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. The (Segmentation and Reassembly) SAR driver translates packets into ATM cells. It also receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets. These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up. inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received. inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected. outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have been sent. ATM Loopback Test outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected. Click this button to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The ZyXEL Device sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the ZyXEL Device. The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 285 Chapter 26 Diagnostic Table 82 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line (continued) ITEM DSL Line Status DESCRIPTION Click this button to view statistics about the DSL connections. 1. noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part of the connection (coming into the ZyXEL Device from the ISP). It is measured in decibels. The higher the number the more signal and less noise there is. 2. output power upstream is the amount of power (in decibels) that the ZyXEL Device is using to transmit to the ISP. 3. attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude (in decibels) of the DSL signal coming into the ZyXEL Device from the ISP. Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) modulation divides up a lines bandwidth into sub-
carriers (sub-channels) of 4.3125 KHz each called tones. The rest of the display is the lines bit allocation. This is displayed as the number (in hexadecimal format) of bits transmitted for each tone. This can be used to determine the quality of the connection, whether a given sub-carrier loop has sufficient margins to support certain ADSL transmission rates, and possibly to determine whether particular specific types of interference or line attenuation exist. Refer to the ITU-T G.992.1 recommendation for more information on DMT. The better (or shorter) the line, the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone. The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15. There will be some tones without any bits as there has to be space between the upstream and downstream channels. Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation, for example:
"Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F/W... Reset ADSL Line Successfully!"
Reset ADSL Line 286 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 27 Troubleshooting 27.1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ZyXEL Device Access and Login Internet Access Wireless Internet Access Phone Calls and VoIP USB Device Connection UPnP 27.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The ZyXEL Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the ZyXEL Device is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ZyXEL Device. 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ZyXEL Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 4 5 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 287 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.6 on page 26. 2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 4 5 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 27.3 ZyXEL Device Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device. 1 2 3 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the ZyXEL Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the ZyXEL Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page 28. I forgot the password. 1 2 288 The default admin password is 1234 and the default user password is user. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page 28. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section on page 162), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled. See Appendix C on page 347. 4 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the ZyXEL Device with the default IP address. See Section 1.7 on page 28. 5 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Try to access the ZyXEL Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the ZyXEL Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the ZyXEL Device does not respond to HTTP. If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a ETHERNET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the ZyXEL Device. 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default user name is admin. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device. Log out of the ZyXEL Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 289 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 4 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 27.2 on page 287. I cannot Telnet to the ZyXEL Device. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. 27.4 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 26. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 4 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure you have enabled the wireless LAN by the WPS/WLAN button or the Network Setting > Wireless
> General screen. 5 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. 290 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection. 1 Check if you set the DSL/WAN switch (on the back of the ZyXEL Device) to the DSL side to have the ZyXEL Device use the DSL port for Internet access. 2 Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN connection with the Internet account information provided by your ISP. 3 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service (all LAN ports and WLAN BSSs are bridged to one WAN connection), make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the Home Networking screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISPs DHCP server. I cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection. 1 Check if you set the DSL/WAN switch (on the back of the ZyXEL Device) to the WAN side to have the ZyXEL Device use the Ethernet WAN port for Internet access. 2 Make sure you connect the Ethernet WAN port to a DSL modem or router in your network. 3 Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet WAN connection with the Internet account information provided by your ISP. 4 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service (all LAN ports and WLAN BSSs are bridged to one WAN connection), make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the Home Networking screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISPs DHCP server. I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection. ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time. I cannot create multiple connections of the same type. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 291 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting Your WAN interface must enable VLAN and fill each WAN connection with different VLAN IDs. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the ZyXEL Device), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 26. 2 3 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 2 3 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.6 on page 26. If the ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications. 27.5 Wireless Internet Access What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?
The following factors may cause interference:
292 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on. Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs. Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices. To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:
Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low. Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones. Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client. Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary. Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. Position the antennas for best reception. If the AP is placed on a table or floor, point the antennas upwards. If the AP is placed at a high position, point the antennas downwards. Try pointing the antennas in different directions and check which provides the strongest signal to the wireless clients. 27.6 Phone Calls and VoIP The telephone port wont work or the telephone lacks a dial tone. 1 Check the telephone connections and telephone wire. I can access the Internet, but cannot make VoIP calls. 1 2 3 The PHONE light should come on. Make sure that your telephone is connected to the PHONE port. You can also check the VoIP status in the System Info screen. If the VoIP settings are correct, use speed dial to make peer-to-peer calls. If you can make a call using speed dial, there may be something wrong with the SIP server, contact your VoIP service provider. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 293 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 27.7 USB Device Connection The ZyXEL Device fails to detect my USB device. 1 Disconnect the USB device. 2 Reboot the ZyXEL Device. 3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. 4 Re-connect your USB device to the ZyXEL Device. 27.8 UPnP When using UPnP and the ZyXEL Device reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My Network Places > Local Network. 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the ZyXEL Devices LAN port or from your computer. 2 Re-connect the Ethernet cable. The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen. Restart your computer. I cannot open special applications such as white board, file transfer and video when I use the MSN messenger. 1 Wait more than three minutes. 2 Restart the applications. 294 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide CHAPTER 28 Product Specifications The following tables summarize the ZyXEL Devices hardware and firmware features. Hardware Specifications Table 83 Hardware Specifications Dimensions Weight Power Specification Built-in Switch 256 (W) x 145 (D) x 40 (H) mm 457 g 12V 1.5A DC Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 Ethernet ports P-2612HNU(L)-F1F: One RJ-11 DSL port DSL Port WAN Port PHONE Ports Line Port (L models only) RESET Button WLAN/WPS Button USB Port Antenna Operation Temperature Storage Temperature Operation Humidity Storage Humidity P-2612HNU(L)-F3F: One RJ-45 DSL port One RJ-45 WAN port 2 RJ-11 FXS POTS ports One FXO (Foreign Exchange Office) lifeline port Restores factory defaults 1 second: Turn on or off WLAN 5 seconds: Start WPS Two USB v2.0 ports for file sharing or print server setup Two 2 dBi external fixed antennas, 2 x 2 0 C ~ 40 C
-30 ~ 60 C 20% ~ 95% RH 20% ~ 95% RH P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 295 Chapter 28 Product Specifications 137.20mm Table 83 Hardware Specifications (continued) Distance between the centers of the holes
(for wall-mounting) on the devices back Screw size for wall-
mounting M4 tap Firmware Specifications Table 84 Firmware Specifications 192.168.1.1 Default IP Address Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) admin Default User Name 1234 Default Password DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address: 192.168.1.33 Static DHCP Addresses Static Routes Device Management Wireless Functionality
(wireless devices only) Firmware Upgrade Size: 32 10 16 Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the ZyXEL Device. Allow the IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly. Enable wireless security (WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network. Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator, an HTTP/FTP/SCP/SFTP tool to put it on the ZyXEL Device. Configuration Backup
& Restoration Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Make a copy of the ZyXEL Devices configuration. You can put it back on the ZyXEL Device later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration. Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address. Use NAT to convert your public IP address(es) to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network. If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet. Use this feature to have the ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. 296 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 84 Firmware Specifications (continued) Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider. IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The ZyXEL Device supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP
(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236). Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your ZyXEL Device. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs. Use logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the ZyXEL Device to an external syslog server. A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network. Your device has a stateful inspection firewall with DoS (Denial of Service) protection. By default, when the firewall is activated, all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN is blocked unless it is initiated from the LAN. The firewall supports TCP/UDP inspection, DoS detection and prevention, real time alerts, reports and logs. You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. IP Multicast Time and Date Logs Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Firewall QoS (Quality of Service) Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP or FTP traffic for PPPoE Support
(RFC2516) Multiple PVC
(Permanent Virtual Circuits) Support Packet Filters example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the ZyXEL Device. PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL. The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers. Your device supports one Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs). Your devices packet filtering function allows added network security and management. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 297 Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 84 Firmware Specifications (continued) ADSL Standards Support ITU G.992.1 G.dmt EOC specified in ITU-T G.992.1 ADSL2 G.dmt.bis (G.992.3) ADSL 2/2+ AnnexM ADSL2+ (G.992.5) Reach-Extended ADSL (RE ADSL) SRA (Seamless Rate Adaptation) Auto-negotiating rate adaptation ADSL physical connection AAL5 (ATM Adaptation Layer type 5) Multi-protocol over AAL5 (RFC 2684) PPP over Ethernet (RFC 2516) Multiple PPPoE LLC-based multiplexing I.610 F4/F5 OAM Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols ICMP ATM QoS IP Multicasting IGMP v1, v2 IGMP Proxy/Snooping Embedded Web Configurator CLI (Command Line Interpreter) Firmware upgrade and configuration file restore through Web/FTP/
SCP/SFTP Telnet for remote management Remote Management Control: Telnet, FTP, Web, SNMP, SSH/SCP/
SFTP, and ICMP. Remote Firmware Upgrade Syslog TR-069 TR-064 Other Protocol Support Management 298 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications Voice Specifications Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device's phone port, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider. Note: Not all features are supported by all service providers. Consult your service provider for more information. Table 85 Voice Features Call Return Country Code Do not Disturb
(DnD) Phone config Call waiting Call forwarding Caller ID Dynamic Jitter Buffer Multiple SIP Accounts Multiple Voice Channels With call return, you can place a call to the last number that called you (either answered or missed). The last incoming call can be through either SIP or PSTN. Phone standards and settings differ from one country to another, so the settings on your ZyXEL Device must be configured to match those of the country you are in. The country code feature allows you to do this by selecting the country from a list rather than changing each setting manually. Configure the country code feature when you move the ZyXEL Device from one country to another. This feature allows you to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you. You can set each phone independently using its keypad, or configure global settings for all phones using the command line interpreter. The phone config table allows you to customize the phone keypad combinations you use to access certain features on the ZyXEL Device, such as call waiting, call return, and call forward. The phone config table is configurable in command interpreter mode. This feature allows you to hear an alert when you are already using the phone and another person calls you. You can then either reject the new incoming call, put your current call on hold and receive the new incoming call, or end the current call and receive the new incoming call. With this feature, you can set the ZyXEL Device to forward calls to a specified number, either unconditionally (always), when your number is busy, or when you do not answer. You can also forward incoming calls from one specified number to another. The ZyXEL Device supports caller ID, which allows you to see the originating number of an incoming call (on a phone with a suitable display). The built-in adaptive buffer helps to smooth out the variations in delay (jitter) for voice traffic. This helps ensure good voice quality for your conversations. You can simultaneously use multiple voice (SIP) accounts and assign them to the telephone port. Your device can simultaneously handle multiple voice channels
(telephone calls). Additionally you can answer an incoming phone call on a VoIP account, even while someone else is using the account for a phone call. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 299 Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 85 Voice Features (continued) Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression Comfort Noise Generation Voice Activity Detection (VAD) reduces the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting when you are not speaking. Your device generates background noise to fill moments of silence when the other device in a call stops transmitting because the other party is not speaking (as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection). Echo Cancellation You device supports G.168, an ITU-T standard for eliminating the QoS (Quality of Service) Other Voice Features echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. Quality of Service (QoS) mechanisms help to provide better service on a per-flow basis. Your device supports Type of Service (ToS) tagging and Differentiated Services (DiffServ) tagging. This allows the device to tag voice frames so they can be prioritized over the network. SIP version 2 (Session Initiation Protocol RFC 3261) SDP (Session Description Protocol RFC 2327) RTP/RTCP (RFC 3550) RTP/AV Profile (RFC 3551) Voice codecs (coder/decoders) G.711, G.729ab, G.726, G.722 Fax and data modem discrimination DTMF Detection and Generation DTMF: In-band and Out-band traffic (RFC 2833),(PCM), (SIP INFO) Point-to-point call establishment between two IADs Quick dialing through predefined phone book, which maps the phone dialing number and destination URL. Flexible Dial Plan (RFC3525 section 7.1.14) Wireless Features Table 86 Wireless Features External Antenna Multiple SSID MAC Address Filtering The ZyXEL Device is equipped with two fixed antennas to provide a clear radio signal between the wireless stations and the access points. Multiple SSID allows the ZyXEL Device to operate up to 4 different wireless networks simultaneously, each with independently configurable wireless and security settings. Your device can check the MAC addresses of clients against a list of allowed MAC addresses. 300 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 86 Wireless Features (continued) WEP Encryption Wi-Fi Protected Access WPA2 WPS Other Wireless Features WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encrypts data frames before transmitting over the wireless network to help keep network communications private. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i security standard. Key differences between WPA and WEP are user authentication and improved data encryption. WPA 2 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Wi-Fi Protected Setup IEEE 802.11n Compliance Frequency Range: 802.11b/g/n ISM Band: 2.4 GHz Advanced Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
(OFDM) Turn on-off WLAN by WLAN button (press the WLAN button for one second to turn the WLAN on or turn off; five seconds to turn on WPS) IEEE 802.11i IEEE 802.11e Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Data Encryption 64/128 bit WLAN bridge to LAN WLAN bridge to DSL/Ethernet WAN IEEE 802.1x External RADIUS server WLAN Scheduling The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in the ZyXEL Device. Table 87 Standards Supported STANDARD RFC 867 RFC 868 RFC 1112 RFC 1305 RFC 1483 RFC 1631 RFC 1661 RFC 2236 RFC 2516 RFC 2684 RFC 2766 DESCRIPTION Daytime Protocol Time Protocol IGMP v1 Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3) Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 IP Network Address Translator (NAT) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE) Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 Network Address Translation - Protocol P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 301 Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 87 Standards Supported (continued) STANDARD IEEE 802.11 IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11d 802.1x IEEE 802.11e QoS ANSI T1.413, Issue 2 G dmt(G.992.1) DESCRIPTION Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/
WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802) Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band and 5 gigahertz (GHz) band Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) standard G.992.1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) Transceivers ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G.992.1 (G.DMT) ITU G.992.2 (G. Lite) ITU G.992.3
(G.dmt.bis) ITU G.992.4
(G.lite.bis) ITU G.992.5 (ADSL2+) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2+) that extends the RFC 2383 TR-069 TR-064 1.363.5 capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits ST2+ over ATM Protocol Specification - UNI 3.1 Version TR-069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management DSL Forum LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration Compliant AAL5 SAR (Segmentation And Re-assembly) Wall-mounting Instructions Do the following to hang your ZyXEL Device on a wall. Note: See Table 83 on page 295 for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them. 1 Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions. Use a sturdy wall. 2 Drill two holes for the screws. Make sure the distance between the centers of the holes matches what is listed in the product specifications appendix. Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws. 302 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications 3 Do not screw the screws all the way into the wall. Leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall. 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall. They need to hold the weight of the ZyXEL Device with the connection cables. 5 Align the holes on the back of the ZyXEL Device with the screws on the wall. Hang the ZyXEL Device on the screws. Figure 130 Wall-mounting Example The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting. All measurements are in millimeters (mm). Figure 131 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 303 Chapter 28 Product Specifications 304 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide APPENDIX A IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device
(such as computers, servers, routers, and printers) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. Structure An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 305 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. Figure 132 Network Number and Host ID How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 88 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Network Number Host ID 306 2ND OCTET:
(168) 10101000 4TH 1ST OCTET OCTET:
(2)
(192) 11000000 00000010 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 11000000 10101000 00000001 3RD OCTET:
(1) 00000001 00000010 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 89 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST OCTET 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 8-bit mask 16-bit mask 24-bit mask 29-bit mask 2ND OCTET 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 3RD OCTET 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 4TH OCTET 00000000 00000000 00000000 11111000 DECIMAL 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network
(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 90 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE 8 bits 16 bits 24 bits 29 bits 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.248 24 bits 16 bits 8 bits 3 bits 224 2 216 2 28 2 23 2 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 16777214 65534 254 6 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 307 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a / followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. Table 91 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK ALTERNATIVE NOTATION
/24
/25
/26
/27
/28
/29
/30 LAST OCTET
(BINARY) 0000 0000 1000 0000 1100 0000 1110 0000 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL) 0 128 192 224 240 248 252 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. 308 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 133 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or
/25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 309 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-networks, A and B. Figure 134 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. 310 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 92 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 IP Address (Decimal) IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63 Table 93 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127 Table 94 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191 Table 95 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 11000000 11000000 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 311 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Example: Eight Subnets Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 96 Eight Subnets SUBNET FIRST ADDRESS LAST SUBNET ADDRESS 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ADDRESS 30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 Subnet Planning SUBNET MASK The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. Table 97 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) SUBNET 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. Table 98 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER 255.255.128.0 (/17) 255.255.192.0 (/18) SUBNET 32766 16382 SUBNET MASK 2 4 312 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET MASK Table 98 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning (continued) NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 SUBNET 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the ZyXEL Device. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your ZyXEL Device that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 313 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address. Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources. The devices may also be unreachable through the network. Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example computer A has a static (or fixed) IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client. Neither can access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP 314 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically. Figure 135 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks, it must have interfaces using different network numbers. For example, if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet
(WAN), the routers LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets. In the following example, the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet. The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks. Figure 136 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example, the computer and the routers LAN port both use 192.168.1.1 as the IP address. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 315 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The computer cannot access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the routers LAN port. Figure 137 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example 316 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide APPENDIX B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Note: Your specific ZyXEL Device may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported. This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network. Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer. If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure that your networks computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet. In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:
Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 317 Windows Vista on page 321 Windows 7 on page 325 Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 329 Mac OS X: 10.5 on page 333 Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 336 Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 341 Windows XP/NT/2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 317 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 1 Click Start > Control Panel. Figure 138 Windows XP: Start Menu 2 In the Control Panel, click the Network Connections icon. Figure 139 Windows XP: Control Panel 318 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Figure 140 Windows XP: Control Panel > Network Connections > Properties 4 On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties. Figure 141 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 319 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens. Figure 142 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 6 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided. 7 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 8 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 320 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional. 1 Click Start > Control Panel. Figure 143 Windows Vista: Start Menu 2 In the Control Panel, click the Network and Internet icon. Figure 144 Windows Vista: Control Panel P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 321 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon. Figure 145 Windows Vista: Network And Internet 4 Click Manage network connections. Figure 146 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center 5 Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Figure 147 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 322 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties. Figure 148 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 323 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens. Figure 149 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 8 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.Click Advanced. 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 324 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information. Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise. 1 Click Start > Control Panel. Figure 150 Windows 7: Start Menu 2 In the Control Panel, click View network status and tasks under the Network and Internet category. Figure 151 Windows 7: Control Panel P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 325 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 Click Change adapter settings. Figure 152 Windows 7: Network And Sharing Center 4 Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties. Figure 153 Windows 7: Local Area Connection Status Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. 326 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties. Figure 154 Windows 7: Local Area Connection Properties P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 327 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 6 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens. Figure 155 Windows 7: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically. Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided. Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP, DNS and WINS. 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. Verifying Settings 1 Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. 328 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 The IP settings are displayed as follows. Figure 156 Windows 7: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3. 1 Click Apple > System Preferences. Figure 157 Mac OS X 10.4: Apple Menu P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 329 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the System Preferences window, click the Network icon. Figure 158 Mac OS X 10.4: System Preferences 3 When the Network preferences pane opens, select Built-in Ethernet from the network connection type list, and then click Configure. Figure 159 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences 330 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 list in the TCP/IP tab. Figure 160 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > TCP/IP Tab. 5 For statically assigned settings, do the following:
From the Configure IPv4 list, select Manually. In the IP Address field, type your IP address. In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 331 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address In the Router field, type the IP address of your device. Figure 161 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > Ethernet 6 Click Apply Now and close the window. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info tab. Figure 162 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility 332 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Mac OS X: 10.5 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5. 1 Click Apple > System Preferences. Figure 163 Mac OS X 10.5: Apple Menu 2 In System Preferences, click the Network icon. Figure 164 Mac OS X 10.5: Systems Preferences P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 333 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the Network preferences pane opens, select Ethernet from the list of available connection types. Figure 165 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet 4 5 From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings. For statically assigned settings, do the following:
From the Configure list, select Manually. In the IP Address field, enter your IP address. In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask. 334 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address In the Router field, enter the IP address of your ZyXEL Device. Figure 166 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet 6 Click Apply and close the window. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 335 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab. Figure 167 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:
336 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 1 Click System > Administration > Network. Figure 168 Ubuntu 8: System > Administration Menu 2 When the Network Settings window opens, click Unlock to open the Authenticate window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.) You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password. Figure 169 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 337 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 4 In the Authenticate window, enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button. Figure 170 Ubuntu 8: Administrator Account Authentication In the Network Settings window, select the connection that you want to configure, then click Properties. Figure 171 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections 338 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 The Properties dialog box opens. Figure 172 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Properties In the Configuration list, select Automatic Configuration (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. In the Configuration list, select Static IP address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address fields. 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 339 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 7 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 173 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > DNS 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes. Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking System > Administration > Network Tools, and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices 340 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address tab. The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly. Figure 174 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in the K Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:
P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 341 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 1 Click K Menu > Computer > Administrator Settings (YaST). Figure 175 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu 2 When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and click OK. Figure 176 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu 342 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens, select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon. Figure 177 openSUSE 10.3: YaST Control Center 4 When the Network Settings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the appropriate connection Name from the list, and then click the Configure button. Figure 178 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 343 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens, click the Address tab Figure 179 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup 6 Select Dynamic Address (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address. Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Hostname fields. 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window. 344 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Hostname/DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 180 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 345 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computers IP Address Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP properties. From the Options sub-menu, select Show Connection Information. Figure 181 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager When the Connection Status - KNetwork Manager window opens, click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly. Figure 182 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager 346 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide APPENDIX C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 183 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 347 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 184 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. 348 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 185 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 349 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 186 Pop-up Blocker Settings 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. 6 Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScript If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScript are allowed. 350 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 187 Internet Options: Security 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 351 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window. Figure 188 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 352 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window. Figure 189 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 353 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 190 Java (Sun) Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary. You can enable Java, JavaScript and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears. Figure 191 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options 354 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 192 Mozilla Firefox Content Security P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 355 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 356 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide APPENDIX D Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 193 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 357 Appendix D Wireless LANs with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 194 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. 358 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. Figure 195 Infrastructure WLAN Channel A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. RTS/CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 359 Appendix D Wireless LANs wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. Figure 196 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS
(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. 360 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Fragmentation Threshold Appendix D Wireless LANs A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the ZyXEL Device uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point
(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 361 Appendix D Wireless LANs several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 99 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE
(MBPS) 1 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/
48/54 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) MODULATION Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the ZyXEL Device are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ZyXEL Device identity. The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your ZyXEL Device. Table 100 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ZyXEL Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. 362 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 363 Appendix D Wireless LANs Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate
(also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. 364 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-
TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 365 Appendix D Wireless LANs Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 101 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes LEAP PEAP Yes Yes No Optional No Yes Yes Yes Strong Moderate Moderate Moderate Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2
(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. 366 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA and WPA2 use Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP) to offer stronger encryption than TKIP. TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-
packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 367 Appendix D Wireless LANs keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-
authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number
(default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. 3 A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. 368 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 197 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 2 3 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 369 Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 198 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 102 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X ENCRYPTIO N METHOD None No Open Shared WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK WEP WEP No Yes Yes No Yes TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES Yes No Yes No Yes Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable 370 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz
(IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 371 Appendix D Wireless LANs Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points. Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. WiFi Protected Setup Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 372 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Push Button Configuration Appendix D Wireless LANs WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. 2 3 Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 6.4 on page 131). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (you can change it to a new random number by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). When you use the PIN method, you must enter the enrollees PIN into the registrar. Then, when WPS is activated on the enrollee, it presents its PIN to the registrar. If the PIN matches, the registrar sends the network and security information to the enrollee, allowing it to join the network. The advantage of using the PIN method rather than the PBC method is that you can ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in the area. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the PIN method. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 373 Appendix D Wireless LANs 1 Decide which device you want to be the registrar (usually the AP) and which you want to be the enrollee (usually the client). 2 3 Look for the enrollees WPS PIN; it may be displayed on the device. If you dont see it, log into the enrollees configuration interface and locate the PIN. Select the PIN connection mode (not PBC connection mode). See the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 6.4 on page 131. Log into the configuration utility of the registrar. Select the PIN connection mode
(not the PBC connection mode). Locate the place where you can enter the enrollees PIN (if you are using the ZyXEL Device, see Section 6.4 on page 131). Enter the PIN from the enrollee device. 4 Activate WPS on both devices within two minutes. Note: Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 5 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 374 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 199 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:
WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 375 Appendix D Wireless LANs already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 200 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all 376 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 201 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 202 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 377 Appendix D Wireless LANs In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 203 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O C G T I N X I S E SECURITYINFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP1 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-
PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). 378 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients
(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 379 Appendix D Wireless LANs 380 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide APPENDIX E Common Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/
code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) web site. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/
UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. Table 103 Commonly Used Services NAME AH
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) PROTOCOL User-Defined PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 51 AIM/New-ICQ TCP AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP DNS UDP TCP/UDP 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. It is also used as a listening port by ICQ. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for example www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 381 Appendix E Common Services Table 103 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) PROTOCOL User-Defined PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 50 FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP 79 20 21 1720 80 443 User-Defined 1 ICQ UDP 4000 IGMP
(MULTICAST) User-Defined 2 IKE IRC UDP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP TCP TCP UDP TCP NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING 500 6667 1863 5190 144 2049 119 User-Defined 1 POP3 TCP 110 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Management Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). 382 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Table 103 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME PPTP PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL
(GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO TCP TCP REXEC RLOGIN RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP SFTP SMTP TCP TCP SNMP TCP/UDP SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP SQL-NET TCP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TCP/UDP UDP UDP TACACS TELNET UDP TCP 512 7070 514 513 107 554 115 25 161 162 1521 22 1558 514 49 23 Appendix E Common Services Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. Simple File Transfer Protocol. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP
(RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 383 Appendix E Common Services Table 103 Commonly Used Services (continued) NAME TFTP PROTOCOL UDP PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 69 VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol). Another videoconferencing solution. 384 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide APPENDIX F Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2013 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Your use of the ZyXEL Device is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 385 Appendix F Legal Information provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-
limited to channels 1 through 11. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 am must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. 386 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Appendix F Legal Information Ce produit est conu pour les bandes de frquences 2,4 GHz conformment la lgislation Europenne. En France mtropolitaine, suivant les dcisions n03-908 et 03-909 de l'ARCEP, la puissance d'mission ne devra pas dpasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre d'une installation WiFi en extrieur pour les frquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz. Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://
www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com. P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 387 Appendix F Legal Information 388 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Index Index bandwidth management 187 Basic Service Set, see BSS blinking LEDs 26 Broadband 93 broadcast 117 BSS 141, 373 example 142 BYE request 250 C CA 219, 381 call forwarding 315 call hold 254 call park and pickup 314 call return 314 call rule 243 call service mode 253 call transfer 254 call waiting 254, 314 caller ID 315 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CBR (Constant Bit Rate) 100, 105, 108 certificate factory default 223 Certificate Authority, see CA certificates 219 CA 219 replacing 223 storage space 223 thumbprint algorithms 222 thumbprints 222 trusted CAs 224, 225 verifying fingerprints 221 Certification Authority, see CA certifications 425 notices 425 viewing 426 CFI 117 389 A AAL5 312 ACK message 250 activation SSID 132 wireless LAN scheduling 137 adding a printer example 66 administrator password 30 ADSL2 312 Advanced Encryption Standard, see AES AES 383 ALG 316 alternative subnet mask notation 324 antenna 309 directional 388 gain 387 omni-directional 388 AP (Access Point) 375 Application Layer Gateway 316 applications Internet access 22 activation 162 iTunes server 161 VoIP 23 Asynchronous Transfer Mode 297 ATM Adaptation Layer 5, see AAL5 audience 3 authentication 138, 140 RADIUS server 140 auto dial 314 automatic logout 30 auto-negotiating rate adaptation 312 B backup configuration 291 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide Index channel 375 interference 375 channel scan 125 channel, wireless LAN 123 Class of Service 251 Class of Service, see CoS client list 156 client-server protocol 247 codecs 316 comfort noise generation 228, 315 command interface 25 configuration 164 backup 291 reset 293 restoring 292 copyright 425 CoS 198, 251 country code 314 CTS (Clear to Send) 376 CTS threshold 138 D data fragment threshold 138 default LAN IP address 29 Denial of Service, see DoS device management command interface 25 Telnet 25 DHCP 90, 152, 164, 165, 209 DHCP relay 310 DHCP server 310 diagnostic 295 differentiated services 252 Differentiated Services, see DiffServ DiffServ (Differentiated Services) 251 code points 251 marking rule 199, 252 disclaimer 425 DLNA 161 DnD 314 DNS 152, 183 DNS server address assignment 117 Do not Disturb, see DnD domain name system, see DNS Domain Name System. See DNS. DS (Differentiated Services) 198 DS field 198, 252 DSCP 198, 251 DSL line, reinitialize 298 DTMF 251 detection and generation 316 Dual-Tone MultiFrequency, see DTMF dynamic DNS 209 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP dynamic jitter buffer 315 dynamic WEP key exchange 382 DYNDNS wildcard 209 E EAP Authentication 380 echo cancellation 229, 315 Encapsulation 113 MER 113 PPP over Ethernet 113 encapsulation 95 RFC 1483 113 encryption 140, 383 ESS 374 Europe type call service mode 253 Extended Service Set IDentification 124, 133 Extended Service Set, see ESS external antenna 316 external RADIUS 317 F F4/F5 OAM 312 File Sharing 159 file sharing 24 filters MAC address 139 firewalls 211 configuration 213 390 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide security 215 firmware 289 flash key 253 flashing 253 fragmentation threshold 138, 377 frequency range 317 FTP 202 G G.168 229, 315 G.711 316 G.729 316 G.992.1 312 G.992.3 312 G.992.5 312 H hidden node 375 host 265 host name 89 humidity 309 I IAD 21 IANA 166, 330 IBSS 373 IEEE 802.11g 377 IEEE 802.11g wireless LAN 316 IEEE 802.11i 316 IEEE 802.1Q 116 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN 252 IGMP 117 version 117 IGMP proxy 313 IGMP v1 313 IGMP v2 313 importing trusted CAs 225 Index Independent Basic Service Set, see IBSS initialization vector (IV) 383 install UPnP 168 Windows Me 168 Windows XP 170 Integrated Access Device, see IAD intended audience 3 Internet access 22 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority, see IANA Internet Service Provider, see ISP IP address 90, 165 default 29 ping 295 WAN 95 IP Address Assignment 116 IP multicasting 313 IP pool 156 IP pool setup 165 ISP 95 iTunes server 161 ITU-T 229 ITU-T G.992.1 298 J jitter buffer 315 L LAN 151 and USB printer 163 client list 156 MAC address 157 LAN TCP/IP 165 limitations wireless LAN 141 WPS 148 listening port 232 Local Area Network, see LAN login passwords 30 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 391 Index logout 30 automatic 30 logs 257, 261, 277 M MAC 89, 217 MAC address 157 filter 139 MAC address filtering 217 MAC filter 217 managing the device command interface 25 good habits 26 Telnet 25 using FTP. See FTP. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 100, 105, 109, 114 MBSSID 142 Message Integrity Check, see MIC MIC 383 model name 89 MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 116 multicast 117 multimedia 245 Multiple BSS, see MBSSID multiple PVC support 311 multiple SIP accounts 315 multiple voice channels 315 multiplexing 114 LLC-based 114 VC-based 114 multiprotocol encapsulation 113 O OAM 312 OK response 250 operation humidity 309 operation temperature 309 P Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 383, 385 park 314 passphrase 127 passwords 30 PBC 143 Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 100, 105, 108, 114 peer-to-peer calls 243 Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB PHB 199, 252 phone book speed dial 243 phone config 314 pickup 314 PIN, WPS 144 example 145 point-to-point calls 316 ports 26 power adaptor 317 power specifications 309 PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Link Layer Protocol 313 PPP over ATM AAL5 312 PPP over Ethernet 312 PPP over Ethernet, see PPPoE PPPoE 95, 113, 311 N NAT 165, 203, 329 definitions 206 how it works 207 what it does 207 Network Address Translation, see NAT network map 33 non-proxy calls 243 Benefits 113 preamble 138 preamble mode 377 print server 24 Printer Server 163 printer sharing and LAN 163 configuration 61 requirements 163 392 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide TCP/IP port 61 product registration 426 profile 45 protocol 95 PSK 383 PSTN call setup signaling 251 pulse dialing 251 Push Button Configuration, see PBC push button, WPS 143 Q QoS 187, 188, 198, 251, 315 Quality of Service 315 Quality of Service, see QoS quick dialing 316 Quick Start Guide 29 R RADIUS 317, 379 message types 379 messages 379 shared secret key 380 RADIUS server 140 Reach-Extended ADSL 312 Real time Transport Protocol, see RTP region 314 registration product 426 reinitialize the ADSL line 298 related documentation 3 REN 315 Request To Send, see RTS reset 293 RESET button 28 restart 293 restoring configuration 292 RFC 1483 113, 312 RFC 1631 201 RFC 1889 249, 316 RFC 1890 316 Index RFC 2327 316 RFC 2364 312 RFC 2516 311, 312 RFC 2684 312 RFC 3261 316 Ringer Equivalence Number, see REN router features 22 RTCP 316 RTP 249, 316 RTS (Request To Send) 376 threshold 375, 376 RTS threshold 138 S safety warnings 7 scan 125 scheduling wireless LAN 137 SDP 316 seamless rate adaptation 312 security wireless LAN 138 security, network 215 service access control 270 Service Set 124, 133 Session Description Protocol 316 Session Initiation Protocol, see SIP silence suppression 228, 315 SIP 245 account 245 accounts 315 ALG 316 Application Layer Gateway 316 call progression 249 client 247 identities 245 INVITE request 250 number 246 proxy server 247 redirect server 248 register server 249 servers 247 service domain 246 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 393 Index URI 245 user agent 247 version 2 316 SMTP error messages 278 SNMP 313 speed dial 243 SRA 312 SSID 139 activation 132 MBSSID 142 stateful inspection 311 static route 179 static VLAN status 87 status indicators 26 storage humidity 309 storage temperature 309 subnet 321 subnet mask 165, 322 subnetting 324 supplementary services 252 Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) 100, 105, 109 Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 114 syntax conventions 5 system firmware 289 passwords 30 status 87 System Info 89 system name 89, 272 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI TCP/IP port 61 Telnet 25 temperature 309 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol, see TKIP The 95 three-way conference 254 thresholds data fragment 138 RTS/CTS 138 TKIP 383 ToS 251 TPID 116 traffic shaping 114 transparent bridging 313 trusted CAs, and certificates 224 tutorial VoIP 51 wireless 40 Type of Service, see ToS U unicast 117 Uniform Resource Identifier 245 Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP upgrading firmware 289 UPnP 158 forum 153 security issues 153 USB features 24 USB printer 24 V VAD 228, 315 version firmware version 90 VID Virtual Circuit (VC) 114 Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN Virtual Local Area Network, see VLAN VLAN 116, 252 group 252 ID 252 ID tags 252 Introduction 116 number of possible VIDs priority frame static 394 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide VLAN ID 116 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 116 voice activity detection 228, 315 voice channels 315 voice coding 250 VoIP 245 features 23 peer-to-peer calls 243 standards compliance 315 tutorial 51 VoIP features 23 W WAN Wide Area Network, see WAN 93 warnings 7 warranty 426 note 426 Web Configurator 29 web configurator passwords 30 WEP 127, 141, 316 WEP Encryption 128 Wi-Fi Protected Access, see WPA Wired Equivalent Privacy, see WEP wireless client configuration 42 profile 45 security 378 tutorial 40 wireless client WPA supplicants 384 wireless LAN 121 authentication 138, 140 BSS 141 example 142 channel 123 encryption 140 example 122 fragmentation threshold 138 limitations 141 MAC address filter 139, 316 MBSSID 142 preamble 138 Index RADIUS server 140 RTS/CTS threshold 138 scheduling 137 security 138 SSID 139 activation 132 WEP 141 WPA 141 WPA-PSK 141 WPS 143, 145 example 147 limitations 148 PIN 144 push button 143 wireless network example 121 wireless security 378 WLAN 121 auto-scan channel 125 interference 375 passphrase 127 scheduling 137 security parameters 386 see also wireless. WEP 127 WLAN button 25 WPA 141, 316, 382 key caching 384 pre-authentication 384 user authentication 384 vs WPA-PSK 383 wireless client supplicant 384 with RADIUS application example 384 WPA2 382 user authentication 384 vs WPA2-PSK 383 wireless client supplicant 384 with RADIUS application example 384 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key, see WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK 382, 383 application example 385 WPA-PSK 141, 383 application example 385 WPS 143, 145 example 147 limitations 148 PIN 144 example 145 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide 395 Index push button 143 396 P-2612HNU(L)-FxF Users Guide
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2013-05-08 | 2422 ~ 2452 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2013-05-08
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0021059092
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
No.2, Industry East Road IX, Science Park
|
||||
| 1 |
Hsinchu, N/A
|
|||||
| 1 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@micomlabs.com
|
||||
| 1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
I88
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
P2612HNUF1F
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
E**** B****
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Section Manager
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
886 3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
886 3********
|
||||
| 1 |
E******@zyxel.com.tw
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Teleconformity
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M****** K****
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
Rietven 31
|
||||
| 1 |
Enschede, Overyssel, 7534NH
|
|||||
| 1 |
Netherlands
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
(31)8********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
(31)8********
|
||||
| 1 |
m******@teleconformity.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | ADSL2+ VoIP IAD | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | Power Output listed is Conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a device, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Cerpass Technology (SuZhou) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M******** C******
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
86-05******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
86-05********
|
||||
| 1 |
m******@cerpass.net
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 20 MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.5211 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 15C | 20 MO | 2422 | 2452 | 0.4677 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC